[go: up one dir, main page]

CN100584003C - Transmitting apparatus and method - Google Patents

Transmitting apparatus and method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN100584003C
CN100584003C CN 200510084849 CN200510084849A CN100584003C CN 100584003 C CN100584003 C CN 100584003C CN 200510084849 CN200510084849 CN 200510084849 CN 200510084849 A CN200510084849 A CN 200510084849A CN 100584003 C CN100584003 C CN 100584003C
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
section
click
image
data
area
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related
Application number
CN 200510084849
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN1842158A (en
Inventor
近藤哲二郎
小林直树
金丸昌宪
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sony Corp
Original Assignee
Sony Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sony Corp filed Critical Sony Corp
Publication of CN1842158A publication Critical patent/CN1842158A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN100584003C publication Critical patent/CN100584003C/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Information Transfer Between Computers (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)
  • Image Processing (AREA)

Abstract

在发送方,背景图像和对象#1至#3每个以传送速率R/4发送。在接收方,以特定的空间分辨率和特定的时间分辨率显示由对象#1至#3和背景图像组成的图像。在此情况下,接收方在特定时间t1拖动对象#1时,在发送方则停止对背景图像和对象#2和#3的传送。此时以传送路径的传送速率R仅发送对象#1。从而,以图像的时间分辨率为代价,显示改善了拖动对象#1的空间分辨率的图像。

Figure 200510084849

On the sending side, the background image and objects #1 to #3 are each sent at the transfer rate R/4. On the receiving side, an image composed of objects #1 to #3 and a background image is displayed at a specific spatial resolution and a specific temporal resolution. In this case, when the receiving side drags the object #1 at a certain time t1, the transmission of the background image and the objects #2 and #3 is stopped on the sending side. At this time, only object #1 is transmitted at the transmission rate R of the transmission path. Thus, an image with improved spatial resolution of dragged object #1 is displayed at the expense of temporal resolution of the image.

Figure 200510084849

Description

发送设备及方法 Sending device and method

本案是申请日为2000年8月9日、申请号为00802048.5、发明名称为“发送、接收及发送和接收的设备及方法、记录介质和信号”的发明专利申请的分案申请。This case is a divisional application of an invention patent application with an application date of August 9, 2000, an application number of 00802048.5, and an invention title of "sending, receiving, and sending and receiving equipment and methods, recording media, and signals".

技术领域 technical field

本发明涉及发送设备,发送方法,接收设备,接收方法,发送和接收设备,发送和接收方法,记录介质,和信号。特别是,本发明涉及允许例如按有限发送速率(具有一个有限发送带宽)发送图像数据和允许显示具有高空间分辨率的图像的一种发送设备,一种发送方法,一种接收设备,一种接收方法,一种发送和接收设备,一种发送和接收方法,一种记录介质,和一种信号。The present invention relates to a transmitting device, a transmitting method, a receiving device, a receiving method, a transmitting and receiving device, a transmitting and receiving method, a recording medium, and a signal. In particular, the present invention relates to a transmitting device, a transmitting method, a receiving device, a A receiving method, a transmitting and receiving device, a transmitting and receiving method, a recording medium, and a signal.

背景技术 Background technique

例如,一个相关参考文件,日本专利待审公开平10-112856公开了一种图像发送设备。在该图像发送设备中,发送方发送图像的一个特定区域的图像数据,该图像其它区域的图像数据相应于接收方发出的命令用不同信息量发送。接收方显示处在含有一个较高空间分辨率(空间方向的分辨率)的指定点的区域中的图像,和显示处在一个较低空间分辨率的其他区域中的图像。For example, a related reference, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication Hei 10-112856, discloses an image transmission device. In this image sending device, a sender sends image data of a specific area of an image, and image data of other areas of the image are sent with different amounts of information corresponding to commands issued by a receiver. The receiving side displays images in an area containing a designated point of a higher spatial resolution (resolution in a spatial direction), and displays images in other areas of a lower spatial resolution.

换句话说,当发送方经一个发送路径向接收方发送图像数据时,发送方不能以高于该发送路径的数据速率发送图像。因而,当接收方在实际的时基上显示一个数据时,发送方将以对应于发送路径的发送速率向接收方发送图像数据。因此,如果发送速率不足够时,那么在接收方显示的图像的空间方向上的空间分辨率则完全恶化。In other words, when a sender sends image data to a receiver via a send path, the sender cannot send images at a data rate higher than that of the send path. Thus, when the receiving side displays a data on the actual time base, the sending side will send the image data to the receiving side at the sending rate corresponding to the sending path. Therefore, if the transmission rate is insufficient, the spatial resolution in the spatial direction of the image displayed on the receiving side deteriorates completely.

为了解决这一问题,在日本专利待审公开平10-112856的图像发送设备中,图像的一个区域中的图像数据和该图像的其它区域中的图像数据以不同信息量发送。含有一个指定点的该区域中的图像和其它区域中的图像在接收方分别以高空间分辨率和低空间分辨率显示。In order to solve this problem, in the image transmission device of Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication Hei 10-112856, image data in one area of an image and image data in other areas of the image are transmitted with different information amounts. The image in this area containing a specified point and the images in other areas are displayed on the receiving side with high spatial resolution and low spatial resolution, respectively.

换句话说,在日本待审公开平10-112856的图像发送设备中,用户要仔细观看的一个部分的空间分辨率的改善是以其它部分的空间分辨率(降低)为代价的。In other words, in the image transmission device of Japanese Laid-Open Publication Hei 10-112856, the improvement of the spatial resolution of a part that the user is to watch carefully comes at the expense of the spatial resolution (reduction) of the other part.

另一方面,在日本专利待审公开平10-112856的图像发送设备中,由于用户要仔细观看的部分空间分辨率的改善是以其它部分的空间分辨率为代价的,所以用户要仔细观看的部分空间分辨率仅以牺牲的空间分辨率为代价得到改善。On the other hand, in the image transmission device of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 10-112856, since the improvement of the spatial resolution of the part that the user wants to watch carefully is at the expense of the spatial resolution of other parts, the image that the user wants to watch carefully is improved. Partial spatial resolution is only improved at the expense of sacrificed spatial resolution.

此外,发送路径的发送速率非常低时,如果用户要仔细观看部分的空间分辨率的改善以其它部分的空间分辨的牺牲为代价,那么其它部分的空间分辨率则严重恶化。在最坏的情况下,用户不能清楚地观看其它部分。In addition, when the transmission rate of the transmission path is very low, if the user wants to carefully watch the improvement of the spatial resolution of some parts at the expense of the spatial resolution of other parts, the spatial resolution of other parts will be seriously deteriorated. In the worst case, the user cannot view other parts clearly.

本发明是基于上述观点做出的。本发明的目的是允许图像的空间分辨率相应于用户的偏爱得到更好的改善。The present invention is made based on the above points of view. The object of the invention is to allow a better improvement of the spatial resolution of the image corresponding to the user's preference.

发明概述Summary of the invention

本发明的第一发送设备是向接收设备发送数据的发送设备,包括:接收装置,用于接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;控制装置,相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据的时间方向、空间方向和电平(level)方向中的至少两个方向的分辨率;和发送装置,向接收设备发送相应于控制信息已经控制至少两个方向中的分辨率的数据。The first sending device of the present invention is a sending device for sending data to a receiving device, comprising: receiving means for receiving control information sent from the receiving device; control means for controlling the time direction of data sent to the receiving device corresponding to the control information , a resolution in at least two directions of a spatial direction and a level direction; and transmitting means for transmitting data corresponding to the control information having controlled the resolution in at least two directions to the receiving device.

本发明的接收设备是接收从发送设备发送的数据的接收设备,包括:发送装置,用于向发送设备发送控制信息,以便相应于控制信息控制数据的时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;接收装置,用于接收发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率在数据的至少两个方向已经得到控制;和输出装置,输出由接收装置接收的数据。The receiving device of the present invention is a receiving device that receives data transmitted from a transmitting device, and includes: transmitting means for transmitting control information to the transmitting device so as to control at least one of the time direction, space direction and level direction of the data corresponding to the control information resolution in two directions; receiving means for receiving data transmitted from the transmitting device, the resolution of which has been controlled in at least two directions of the data; and output means for outputting the data received by the receiving means.

本发明的发送和接收设备是具有用于发送数据的发送设备和用于接收数据的接收设备的发送和接收设备,其中发送设备包括:控制信息接收装置,用于接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;控制装置,用于相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据的时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;和数据发送装置,用于向接收设备发送已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向的分辨率的数据;以及其中接收设备包括:控制信息发送装置,用于发送控制信息;数据接收装置,用于接收从发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率在数据的至少两个方向上被控制;和输出装置,用于输出由数据接收装置接收的数据。The transmitting and receiving device of the present invention is a transmitting and receiving device having a transmitting device for transmitting data and a receiving device for receiving data, wherein the transmitting device includes: control information receiving means for receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device ; The control device is used to control the resolution in at least two directions of the time direction, space direction and level direction of the data sent to the receiving device corresponding to the control information; and the data sending device is used to send the corresponding data to the receiving device. The data that controls the resolution of at least two directions based on the control information; and wherein the receiving device includes: control information sending means for sending control information; data receiving means for receiving data sent from the sending device, the resolution of the data controlled in at least two directions of the data; and output means for outputting the data received by the data receiving means.

本发明的第二发送设备是向接收设备发送数据的发送设备,包括:接收装置,用于接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;归类装置,相应于控制信息对数据归类;和发送装置,相应于数据的归类结果向接收设备发送数据。The second transmitting device of the present invention is a transmitting device for transmitting data to a receiving device, comprising: receiving means for receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device; sorting means for sorting the data corresponding to the control information; and transmitting means for The data is transmitted to the receiving device corresponding to the classification result of the data.

本发明的第一发送方法是向接收设备发送数据的发送方法,包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;和把已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向的分辨率的数据发送给接收设备。The first sending method of the present invention is a sending method for sending data to a receiving device, comprising the following steps: receiving control information sent from the receiving device; resolutions in at least two directions; and transmitting data having controlled resolutions in at least two directions corresponding to the control information to the receiving device.

本发明的接收方法是一个接收从发送设备发送的数据的接收方法,包括以下步骤:向发送设备发送控制信息,以便相应于控制信息控制数据的时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;接收发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率至少在数据的两个方向上被控制;和输出在接收步骤上接收的数据。The receiving method of the present invention is a receiving method for receiving data sent from a sending device, comprising the following steps: sending control information to the sending device so as to control at least two of the time direction, the space direction and the level direction of the data corresponding to the control information resolution in directions; receiving data sent by the transmitting device, the resolution of which is controlled in at least two directions of the data; and outputting the data received in the receiving step.

本发明的发送和接收方法是具有发送数据的发送设备的处理和接收数据的接收设备的处理的发送和接收方法,其中发送设备的处理包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;和把已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向的分辨率的数据发送给接收设备;其中接收设备的处理包括以下步骤:发送控制信息;接收从发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率至少在数据的两个方向上被控制;并输出在数据接收步骤中接收的数据。The transmitting and receiving method of the present invention is a transmitting and receiving method having processing of a transmitting device for transmitting data and processing of a receiving device for receiving data, wherein the processing of the transmitting device includes the steps of: receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device; corresponding to The control information controls the resolution of the data sent to the receiving device in at least two directions of the time direction, the space direction and the level direction; and the data that has controlled the resolution of at least two directions corresponding to the control information is sent to the receiving device ; wherein the processing of the receiving device includes the steps of: sending control information; receiving data sent from the sending device, the resolution of which is controlled in at least two directions of the data; and outputting the data received in the data receiving step.

本发明的第二发送方法是向接收设备发送数据的发送方法,包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息对数据归类;和相应于数据的归类结果向接收设备发送数据。The second transmitting method of the present invention is a transmitting method for transmitting data to a receiving device, comprising the steps of: receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device; classifying the data corresponding to the control information; and sending the classified result corresponding to the data to the receiving device send data.

本发明的第一记录介质是一种记录程序的记录介质,该程序使计算机执行向接收设备发送数据的发送处理,该发送处理包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;和把已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向的分辨率的数据发送给接收设备。The first recording medium of the present invention is a recording medium recording a program that causes a computer to execute transmission processing of transmitting data to a receiving device, the transmission processing including the steps of: receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device; controlling the resolution of the data transmitted to the receiving device in at least two directions of time direction, space direction and level direction; and transmitting the data having the resolution controlled in at least two directions corresponding to the control information to the receiving device.

本发明的第二记录介质是一种记录程序的记录介质,该程序使计算机执行接收从发送设备发送的数据的接收处理,该接收处理包括以下步骤:向发送设备发送控制信息,以便相应于控制信息控制数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;接收从发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率至少在数据的两个方向上已经被控制;和输出在接收步骤中接收的数据。The second recording medium of the present invention is a recording medium recording a program that causes a computer to execute receiving processing for receiving data transmitted from a transmitting device, the receiving process including the steps of: transmitting control information to the transmitting device so as to correspond to the control information control data resolution in at least two directions of a time direction, a space direction, and a level direction; receiving data transmitted from a transmitting device, the resolution of which has been controlled in at least two directions of data; and outputting The data received in the receive step.

本发明的第三记录介质是一种记录程序的记录介质,该程序致使计算机执行发送数据的发送设备的发送处理和接收数据的接收设备的接收处理,其中发送设备的发送处理包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;和把已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向的分辨率的数据发送给接收设备;其中接收设备的接收处理包括以下步骤:发送控制信息;接收从发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率至少在数据的两个方向上已经被控制;并输出在数据接收步骤上接收的数据。A third recording medium of the present invention is a recording medium recording a program that causes a computer to execute transmission processing of a transmission device that transmits data and reception processing of a reception device that receives data, wherein the transmission processing of the transmission device includes the steps of: receiving Control information sent from the receiving device; corresponding to the control information to control the resolution of the data sent to the receiving device in at least two directions of the time direction, space direction and level direction; and controlling at least two resolutions that have been corresponding to the control information The data of the resolution of the direction is sent to the receiving device; wherein the receiving process of the receiving device includes the following steps: sending control information; receiving the data sent from the sending device, the resolution of the data has been controlled in at least two directions of the data; And output the data received on the data receiving step.

本发明的第四记录介质是一种记录程序的记录介质,该程序使计算机执行向接收设备发送数据的发送处理,该发送处理包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息归类数据;和相应于数据的归类结果向接收设备发送数据。A fourth recording medium of the present invention is a recording medium recording a program that causes a computer to execute transmission processing of transmitting data to a receiving device, the transmission processing including the steps of: receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device; categorizing the data; and transmitting the data to a receiving device corresponding to the categorization of the data.

本发明的第一信号是一种包含程序的信号,该程序致使计算机执行向接收设备发送数据的发送处理,该发送处理包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;和把已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向的分辨率的数据发送给接收设备。The first signal of the present invention is a signal containing a program that causes a computer to execute a transmission process of transmitting data to a receiving device, the transmission process including the steps of: receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device; controlling transmission corresponding to the control information resolution in at least two directions of time direction, space direction and level direction of the data to the receiving device; and transmitting the data having the resolution in the at least two directions controlled corresponding to the control information to the receiving device.

本发明的第二信号是一种包含程序的信号,该程序致使计算机执行接收从发送设备发送的数据的接收处理,该接收处理包括以下步骤:向发送设备发送控制信息,以便相应于控制信息控制数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;接收从发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率至少在数据的两个方向上已经被控制;和输出在接收步骤中接收的数据。The second signal of the present invention is a signal containing a program that causes a computer to execute receiving processing for receiving data transmitted from a transmitting device, the receiving process including the steps of: transmitting control information to the transmitting device so as to control the data corresponding to the control information resolution of data in at least two directions of time direction, space direction, and level direction; receiving data transmitted from a transmitting device, the resolution of which has been controlled in at least two directions of data; and outputting in the receiving The data received in the step.

本发明的第三信号是一种包含程序的信号,该程序致使计算机执行发送数据的发送设备的发送处理和接收数据的接收设备的接收处理,其中发送设备的发送处理包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息控制发送给接收设备的数据在时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率;和把已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向的分辨率的数据发送给接收设备;其中接收设备的接收处理包括以下步骤:发送控制信息;接收从发送设备发送的数据,该数据的分辨率至少在数据的两个方向上被控制;和输出在数据接收步骤上接收的数据。The third signal of the present invention is a signal containing a program that causes a computer to execute a transmission process of a transmission device that transmits data and a reception process of a reception device that receives data, wherein the transmission process of the transmission device includes the steps of: receiving The control information sent by the device; corresponding to the control information to control the resolution of the data sent to the receiving device in at least two directions of time direction, space direction and level direction; and controlling the resolution of at least two directions corresponding to the control information The resolution data is sent to the receiving device; wherein the receiving process of the receiving device includes the following steps: sending control information; receiving data sent from the sending device, the resolution of which is controlled in at least two directions of the data; and outputting in The data received on the data receiving step.

本发明的第四信号是一种包含程序的信号,该程序致使计算机执行向接收设备发送数据的发送处理,该发送处理包括以下步骤:接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;相应于控制信息归类数据;和相应于数据的归类结果向接收设备发送数据。A fourth signal of the present invention is a signal containing a program that causes a computer to execute a transmission process of transmitting data to a receiving device, the transmission process including the steps of: receiving control information transmitted from the receiving device; data; and transmitting the data to a receiving device corresponding to the classification result of the data.

根据本发明的第一发送设备、第一发送方法、第一记录介质和第一信号,接收从一个接收设备发送的控制信息。相应于该控制信息,控制时间方向、空间方向和电平方向中的至少两个方向上的分辨率。把相应于该控制信息控制至少两个方向分辨率的数据发送给接收设备。According to the first transmitting device, the first transmitting method, the first recording medium and the first signal of the present invention, control information transmitted from a receiving device is received. Corresponding to the control information, resolutions in at least two directions of time direction, space direction and level direction are controlled. Data for controlling resolution in at least two directions corresponding to the control information is transmitted to the receiving device.

根据本发明的接收设备、接收方法、第二记录介质和第二信号,向发送设备发送控制信息,该发送设备相应于该控制信息控制时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率。此外,相应于该控制信息已经控制的至少两个方向上的分辨率的数据自发送设备发送,接收和输出。According to the receiving device, the receiving method, the second recording medium and the second signal of the present invention, the control information is sent to the sending device, and the sending device controls at least two directions of the time direction, the space direction and the level direction corresponding to the control information. resolution. Furthermore, data corresponding to resolutions in at least two directions which the control information has controlled is transmitted, received and output from the transmitting device.

根据本发明的发送和接收设备、发送和接收方法、第三记录介质和第三信号,发送设备接收自接收设备发送的控制信息。相应于该控制信息,控制时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率备。相应于该控制信息已经控制的至少两个方向上的分辨率的数据备传送给接收设备,此外,接收设备向发送设备发送控制信息。相应于该控制信息控制的至少两个方向上的分辨率的数据自发送设备发送,接收和输出。According to the transmitting and receiving device, the transmitting and receiving method, the third recording medium and the third signal of the present invention, the transmitting device receives the control information transmitted from the receiving device. Corresponding to the control information, resolutions in at least two directions of time direction, space direction and level direction are controlled. Data corresponding to resolutions in at least two directions controlled by the control information are transmitted to the receiving device, and furthermore, the receiving device transmits the control information to the transmitting device. Data corresponding to resolutions in at least two directions controlled by the control information are transmitted, received and output from the transmitting device.

根据本发明的第二发送设备、第二发送方法、第四记录介质和第四信号,接收自一个接收设备发送的控制信号,相应于该控制信息,归类数据。相应于该数据的归类结果,向该接收设备发送数据。According to the second transmitting device, the second transmitting method, the fourth recording medium and the fourth signal of the present invention, a control signal transmitted from a receiving device is received, and data is classified corresponding to the control information. Data is transmitted to the receiving device corresponding to the classification result of the data.

附图的简单说明A brief description of the drawings

图1是显示本发明的实施例的发送系统的结构实例的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a structural example of a transmission system of an embodiment of the present invention;

图2是显示图1所示的发送系统的第一结构的实例的详细示意图;FIG. 2 is a detailed schematic diagram showing an example of a first structure of the transmission system shown in FIG. 1;

图3是显示图1所示的发送设备(终端单元)1的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the transmitting device (terminal unit) 1 shown in FIG. 1;

图4是解释图3所示的发送设备的处理的流程图;FIG. 4 is a flow chart explaining the processing of the transmitting device shown in FIG. 3;

图5是显示图1所示的接收设备(终端单元)2的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the receiving device (terminal unit) 2 shown in FIG. 1;

图6解释图5所示的接收设备2的处理的流程图;FIG. 6 is a flow chart explaining the processing of the receiving apparatus 2 shown in FIG. 5;

图7是显示图3所示的发送处理部分16的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the transmission processing section 16 shown in FIG. 3;

图8是显示图7所示的编码部分31的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the coding section 31 shown in FIG. 7;

图9A、9B和9C是解释分层编码/解码的示意图;9A, 9B and 9C are diagrams for explaining layered encoding/decoding;

图10是解释图7所示的发送处理部分16的发送处理流程图;FIG. 10 is a flow chart explaining the transmission processing of the transmission processing section 16 shown in FIG. 7;

图11是显示图5所示的接收处理部分21的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the reception processing section 21 shown in FIG. 5;

图12是图11所示的解码部分53的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a structural example of the decoding section 53 shown in FIG. 11;

图13是显示图5所示的组合处理部分22的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the combination processing section 22 shown in FIG. 5;

图14是解释图13所示组合处理部分22的组合处理的流程图;FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining combination processing of the combination processing section 22 shown in FIG. 13;

图15A、15B和15C是显示图5所示的图像输出部分23的图像显示实例的示意图;15A, 15B and 15C are diagrams showing an image display example of the image output section 23 shown in FIG. 5;

图16A和16B解释图1所示的从发送设备1向接收设备2发送的图像的空间分辨率与时间分辨率之间关系的示意图;16A and 16B are schematic diagrams explaining the relationship between the spatial resolution and the temporal resolution of images transmitted from the transmitting device 1 to the receiving device 2 shown in FIG. 1;

图17是显示图3所示的对象提取部分14的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the object extraction section 14 shown in FIG. 3;

图18A和18B是解释图17所示的开始区域划分部分83的处理示意图;18A and 18B are diagrams explaining the processing of the start area dividing section 83 shown in FIG. 17;

图19A、19B、19C和19D是解释图17所示的区域拼接部分84的处理的示意图;19A, 19B, 19C and 19D are diagrams for explaining the processing of the region combining section 84 shown in FIG. 17;

图20是图17所示的拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86的处理的示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of the processing of the joined area processing section 85 and the separated area processing section 86 shown in FIG. 17;

图21是解释图17所示的对象提取部分4的对象提取处理的流程图;FIG. 21 is a flowchart explaining object extraction processing of the object extraction section 4 shown in FIG. 17;

图22是解释图21所示的步骤S43上的区域拼接处理细节的流程图;FIG. 22 is a flowchart explaining the details of the area stitching process at step S43 shown in FIG. 21;

图23是图21所示的步骤S44上的拼接区域处理的细节的流程图;FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the details of the merged region processing in step S44 shown in FIG. 21;

图24是解释图21所示的步骤S44上的分离区域处理细节的流程图;FIG. 24 is a flowchart explaining the details of the separation area processing at step S44 shown in FIG. 21;

图25是显示图7所示的控制部分35的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the control section 35 shown in FIG. 7;

图26是解释对象的特征量(feature amount)的示意图;Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram explaining a feature amount (feature amount) of an object;

图27是解释图25所示的控制部分35的处理细节的流程图;FIG. 27 is a flow chart explaining the processing details of the control section 35 shown in FIG. 25;

图28是显示图1所示的发送系统的第二结构的实例的详细示意图;FIG. 28 is a detailed schematic diagram showing an example of a second configuration of the transmission system shown in FIG. 1;

图29是显示图28所示的发送设备1的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the transmitting device 1 shown in FIG. 28;

图30是解释图29所示的发送设备1的处理的流程图;FIG. 30 is a flowchart explaining the processing of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 29;

图31是显示图28所示的接收设备2的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the receiving apparatus 2 shown in FIG. 28;

图32是解释图31所示的接收设备2的处理的流程图;FIG. 32 is a flowchart explaining the processing of the receiving apparatus 2 shown in FIG. 31;

图33是显示图29所示的发送处理部分1016的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the transmission processing section 1016 shown in FIG. 29;

图34是解释图33所示的发送处理部分1016的发送处理的流程图;FIG. 34 is a flowchart for explaining the transmission processing of the transmission processing section 1016 shown in FIG. 33;

图35是显示图31所示的组合处理部分的结构实例的方框图;Fig. 35 is a block diagram showing a structural example of a combination processing section shown in Fig. 31;

图36是解释的图35所示的组合处理部分的组合处理的流程图;FIG. 36 is a flowchart explaining combining processing of the combining processing section shown in FIG. 35;

图37是显示图29所示的对象提取部分1014的实际结构示意图;FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing the actual structure of the object extraction part 1014 shown in FIG. 29;

图38是解释活动对象图像或静止对象图像的提取处理的流程图;FIG. 38 is a flowchart explaining extraction processing of a moving object image or a still object image;

图39是解释静止区域或活动区域确定处理的流程图;FIG. 39 is a flowchart explaining still area or active area determination processing;

图40A、40B、40C、40D和40E是解释帧差(帧间差值)的计算方法的示意图;40A, 40B, 40C, 40D and 40E are schematic views explaining the calculation method of the frame difference (inter-frame difference);

图41是解释连续点击确定处理的流程图;Fig. 41 is a flowchart explaining continuous click determination processing;

图42A、42B、42C、42D、42E和42F是解释对象号分配方法的示意图;42A, 42B, 42C, 42D, 42E and 42F are schematic diagrams for explaining the object number allocation method;

图43是解释静止对象组合处理的流程图;Fig. 43 is a flowchart explaining stationary object combination processing;

图44是解释活动对象组合处理的流程图;Fig. 44 is a flowchart explaining active object combination processing;

图45是解释对象提取处理的流程图;Fig. 45 is a flowchart explaining object extraction processing;

图46A、46B、46C、46D和46E是解释对象提取方法的示意图;46A, 46B, 46C, 46D and 46E are schematic diagrams for explaining the object extraction method;

图47是显示图31所示的组合处理部分1022的另一个结构实例的方框图;FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing another structural example of the combination processing section 1022 shown in FIG. 31;

图48是显示图28所示的发送设备1的另一个结构实例的方框图;FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing another structural example of the transmitting device 1 shown in FIG. 28;

图49是显示图48所示的变化确定和归类部分240的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the variation determination and classification section 240 shown in FIG. 48;

图50A和50B是解释变化确定和归类部分240的兴趣对象区域变化处理和兴趣对象区域归类处理的流程图;50A and 50B are flow charts explaining the object of interest area change processing and object of interest area classification processing of the change determination and classification section 240;

图51是解释兴趣变化确定处理的流程图;FIG. 51 is a flowchart explaining interest change determination processing;

图52是图1所示的发送系统的第三结构的详细实例的示意图;FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram of a detailed example of a third structure of the transmission system shown in FIG. 1;

图53是显示图52所示的收费服务器4的结构实例的方框图;FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing a structural example of the charging server 4 shown in FIG. 52;

图54是解释图53所示的收费服务器4的处理的流程图;FIG. 54 is a flow chart explaining the processing of the charging server 4 shown in FIG. 53;

图55是显示本发明的实施例的计算机的结构实例的方框图。Fig. 55 is a block diagram showing an example of the structure of a computer of an embodiment of the present invention.

实施发明的最好形式The best form of carrying out the invention

图1示出了根据本发明的实施例的图像发送系统的结构(该系统是作为多个装置的逻辑组合的一个实体,而且与每个装置是否设置在一个机架中无关)。FIG. 1 shows the structure of an image transmission system according to an embodiment of the present invention (the system is one entity as a logical combination of a plurality of devices, and it does not matter whether each device is provided in a rack or not).

发送装置由至少两个终端单元1和2组成。就终端单元1和2的关系而言,一个是发送设备,另一个是接收设备。图像(图像数据)从发送设备经传送路径3发送给接收设备。The sending device consists of at least two terminal units 1 and 2 . As far as the relationship between the terminal units 1 and 2 is concerned, one is a transmitting device and the other is a receiving device. Images (image data) are sent from the sending device to the receiving device via the transmission path 3 .

根据本发明的实施例,例如,假定终端单元1是发送设备,而终端设备2是接收设备,并且假定图像数据在它们之间发送和接收。在下文中,终端单元1或2可以被分别称作发送设备1或接收设备2。According to the embodiment of the present invention, for example, it is assumed that the terminal unit 1 is a transmitting device, and the terminal device 2 is a receiving device, and image data is assumed to be transmitted and received between them. Hereinafter, the terminal unit 1 or 2 may be referred to as a transmitting device 1 or a receiving device 2, respectively.

在该情况下,发送设备1经传送路径3向接收设备2发送图像数据。接收设备2接收来自发送设备1的图像数据。下面将要说明图像数据在图像输出部分23(参见图5)上的显示。图像输出部分23例如由液晶显示器或CRT(阴极射线管)组成。此外,接收部分2经传送路径3向发送设备1发送控制信息,该控制信息控制图像输出部分23所显示的图像空间方向的空间分辨率和时间方向的时间分辨率。In this case, the transmitting device 1 transmits image data to the receiving device 2 via the transmission path 3 . The reception device 2 receives image data from the transmission device 1 . The display of image data on the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5) will be described below. The image output section 23 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display or a CRT (cathode ray tube). Furthermore, the receiving section 2 transmits control information, which controls the spatial resolution in the spatial direction and the temporal resolution in the temporal direction of the image displayed by the image output section 23 , to the transmitting device 1 via the transmission path 3 .

发送设备1接收来自接收设备2的控制信息,并相应于该控制信息控制图像数据的传送,使接收设备2所显示的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率在满足预定条件时变化。The sending device 1 receives the control information from the receiving device 2, and controls the transmission of image data corresponding to the control information, so that the spatial resolution and time resolution of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 change when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

就发送设备1和接收设备2来说,可以使用诸如PHS(个人手持电话系统)(商标)单元的终端单元和诸如便携电话单元的便携式终端单元。当使用PHS单元时,传送路径3具有1895.1500至1905.9500Mhz的频带,其传送速率为128Kbps(每秒比特)。As the transmitting device 1 and the receiving device 2, a terminal unit such as a PHS (Personal Handyphone System) (trademark) unit and a portable terminal unit such as a portable telephone unit can be used. When the PHS unit is used, the transmission path 3 has a frequency band of 1895.1500 to 1905.9500 Mhz, and its transmission rate is 128 Kbps (bits per second).

图2示出了图1所示的图像发送系统的第一结构的实例;在此,诸如PHS单元和便携式电话单元的便携式终端单元被用作图1所示的发送设备1和接收设备2。FIG. 2 shows an example of a first configuration of the image transmission system shown in FIG. 1; here, portable terminal units such as a PHS unit and a portable telephone unit are used as the transmitting device 1 and the receiving device 2 shown in FIG.

根据图2所示的实施例,图1所示的传送路径3由无线基站3-1或3-2和交换站3-3组成。该交换站3-3是(例如)连接无线基站3-1和3-2的电话站。无线基站3-1或3-2向/从终端单元1或2发送和接收一个无线信号。在终端单元1与2之间,其每一个可以经过由无线基站3-1和3-2、收费服务器4等组成的传送路径3向另一个发送信号,并从另一个终端接收信号。基站3-1的类型可以基站3-2的类型相同或者不相同。According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the transmission path 3 shown in FIG. 1 is composed of a radio base station 3-1 or 3-2 and a switching station 3-3. The switching station 3-3 is, for example, a telephone station connecting the wireless base stations 3-1 and 3-2. The wireless base station 3-1 or 3-2 transmits and receives a wireless signal to/from the terminal unit 1 or 2. Between terminal units 1 and 2, each of them can transmit a signal to the other and receive a signal from the other terminal via a transmission path 3 composed of wireless base stations 3-1 and 3-2, charging server 4, and the like. The type of base station 3-1 may be the same as or different from that of base station 3-2.

参见图2,终端单元1包括摄像机部分1-1、显示器部分1-2、按键部分1-3、扬声器部分1-4和麦克风1-5。摄影机部分1-1具有可以摄取活动图像的图像拾取装置和光系统。显示部分1-2可以显示字符、符号、图像等。在输入电话号码、字符、命令等时操作按键部分1-3。扬声器1-4输出声音。麦克风1-5输入声音。同样,终端单元2包括摄影机部分2-1、显示部分2-2、按键部分2-3、扬声器2-4和麦克风2-5,它们分别具有与摄影机部分1-1、显示部分1-2、按键部分1-3、扬声器1-4和麦克风1-5相同的结构。Referring to FIG. 2, the terminal unit 1 includes a camera section 1-1, a display section 1-2, a key section 1-3, a speaker section 1-4, and a microphone 1-5. The camera section 1-1 has an image pickup device and an optical system that can pick up moving images. The display section 1-2 can display characters, symbols, images, and the like. The key sections 1-3 are operated when inputting telephone numbers, characters, commands, and the like. Speakers 1-4 output sound. Microphones 1-5 input sound. Likewise, the terminal unit 2 includes a camera section 2-1, a display section 2-2, a key section 2-3, a speaker 2-4, and a microphone 2-5, which have the same functions as the camera section 1-1, the display section 1-2, The button part 1-3, the speaker 1-4 and the microphone 1-5 have the same structure.

麦克风1-5和1-6采集的语音信号在终端单元1和2之间发送和接收。此外,可以发送和接收由摄像机部分1-1和2-1摄取的图像数据。因此,终端单元1的显示部分1-2可以显示由终端单元2的摄影机部分2-1获取的图像数据。同样,终端单元2的显示部分2-2可以显示由终端单元1的摄影机部分1-1获取的图像数据。Voice signals collected by the microphones 1-5 and 1-6 are sent and received between the terminal units 1 and 2. In addition, image data picked up by the camera sections 1-1 and 2-1 can be sent and received. Therefore, the display section 1 - 2 of the terminal unit 1 can display image data acquired by the camera section 2 - 1 of the terminal unit 2 . Also, the display section 2-2 of the terminal unit 2 can display image data acquired by the camera section 1-1 of the terminal unit 1.

换句话说,发送设备1的摄像机部分1-1所摄取的图像数据以及诸如帧速率的所需信息经过有基站部分3-1和3-2以及交换站3-3组成的传送路径3发送给接收设备2。接收部分2在由例如液晶显示器组成的显示部分2-1上显示接收的图像数据(相对应的图像)。另一方面,接收设备2经传送路径3向发送设备1发送用于控制在显示部分2-1上显示的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率的控制信息。发送设备1接收来自接收设备2的控制信息并相应于控制信息控制图像数据的传送,使接收设备2所显示的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率在满足预定条件时变化。In other words, the image data picked up by the camera section 1-1 of the sending device 1 and required information such as frame rate are sent to the Receive device 2. The receiving section 2 displays received image data (corresponding image) on a display section 2-1 composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. On the other hand, the receiving device 2 transmits control information for controlling the spatial resolution and the temporal resolution of the image displayed on the display section 2-1 to the transmitting device 1 via the transmission path 3. The sending device 1 receives the control information from the receiving device 2 and controls the transmission of image data corresponding to the control information, so that the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 changes when a predetermined condition is met.

下面图3示出了图2所示的发送设备1的结构的实例。FIG. 3 below shows an example of the structure of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 2 .

图像输入部分11相当于图2所示的摄像机部分1-1。图像输入部分11摄取一个特定的对象,并把它的图像输送给预处理部分12。预处理部分12由背景图像提取部分13、对象提取部分14和附加信息计算部分15组成。预处理部分12执行从图像输入部分11输入的图像的预处理和把该合成图像供应给发送处理部分16。The image input section 11 corresponds to the camera section 1-1 shown in FIG. 2 . The image input section 11 picks up a specific object and sends its image to the preprocessing section 12 . The preprocessing section 12 is composed of a background image extraction section 13 , an object extraction section 14 and an additional information calculation section 15 . The preprocessing section 12 performs preprocessing of the image input from the image input section 11 and supplies the synthesized image to the transmission processing section 16 .

换句话说,背景图像提取部分13从图像输入部分11供应的图像中提取所谓的背景图像,和把提取的背景图像供应给发送处理部分16。此外,背景图像提取部分13所提取的背景图像还供应给对象提取部分14和附加信息计算部分15。In other words, the background image extraction section 13 extracts a so-called background image from the image supplied from the image input section 11 , and supplies the extracted background image to the transmission processing section 16 . Furthermore, the background image extracted by the background image extraction section 13 is also supplied to the object extraction section 14 and the additional information calculation section 15 .

作为提取背景图像的方法,获取多个连续帧(例如当前帧和过去的10个帧)的相同空间位置上的多个像素的像素值的出现频率。具有最高频率的像素值可以作为该位置是背景对待。另一方面,可以取得多个帧的相同位置上的像素值的平均值(活动平均值),以作为该位置上的背景图像。As a method of extracting a background image, the frequency of occurrence of pixel values of a plurality of pixels at the same spatial position of a plurality of consecutive frames (for example, the current frame and the past 10 frames) is acquired. The pixel value with the highest frequency can be treated as background for that location. On the other hand, the average value (moving average value) of the pixel values at the same position in multiple frames can be obtained as the background image at the position.

对象提取部分14执行例如从图像输入部分11所供给的图像中减去由背景图像提取部分13所提取的背景图像的减法运算,获得所谓的前景图像,并把该前景图像供应给发送处理部分16。当图像输入部分11输入的图像包含作为前景的多个实体时,对象提取部分14相应于每一实体提取前景图像并将所提取的前景背景提供给发送处理部分16。另一方面,由对象提取部分14提取的前景图像还被提供给附加信息计算部分15。此后,相应于每一实体的前景图像可以看作是一个对象。The object extraction section 14 performs, for example, subtraction of the background image extracted by the background image extraction section 13 from the image supplied from the image input section 11, obtains a so-called foreground image, and supplies the foreground image to the transmission processing section 16 . When the image input by the image input section 11 contains a plurality of entities as the foreground, the object extraction section 14 extracts a foreground image corresponding to each entity and supplies the extracted foreground background to the transmission processing section 16 . On the other hand, the foreground image extracted by the object extraction section 14 is also supplied to the additional information calculation section 15 . Thereafter, the foreground image corresponding to each entity can be regarded as an object.

附加信息计算部分15检测背景图像移动矢量和对象移动矢量。背景图像移动矢量表示由背景图像提取部分13提取的背景图像的移动(相应于图像输入部分11的拍摄方向的移动的背景图像的移动)。对象移动矢量表示由对象提取部分14提取的对象的移动。另外,附加信息计算部分15将对象提取部分14提供的作为附加信息的一帧中的对象的位置信息等提供给发送处理部分16。换句话说,当对象提取部分14提取一个对象时,该对象提取部分14还提取与该对象有关的信息,比如该对象的位置信息等,并把该信息供应给附加信息计算部分15。附加信息计算部分15还把该位置信息等作为附加信息输出。The additional information calculation section 15 detects a background image movement vector and an object movement vector. The background image movement vector represents the movement of the background image extracted by the background image extraction section 13 (the movement of the background image corresponding to the movement of the shooting direction of the image input section 11). The object movement vector represents the movement of the object extracted by the object extraction section 14 . In addition, the additional information calculation section 15 supplies the position information and the like of an object in one frame supplied from the object extraction section 14 as additional information to the transmission processing section 16 . In other words, when the object extraction section 14 extracts an object, the object extraction section 14 also extracts information related to the object, such as position information of the object, etc., and supplies the information to the additional information calculation section 15 . The additional information calculation section 15 also outputs the position information and the like as additional information.

发送处理部分16多路复用由背景图像提取部分13提取的背景图像、由对象提取部分14提取的对象和由附加信息计算部分15获取的附加信息,并按其数据速率经过传送路径3将合成的多路复用数据发送给接收设备2。发送处理部分16经传送路径3接收自接收设备2发送的控制信息,并相应于该控制信息控制背景图像、对象和附加信息的发送,使接收设备2所显示的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率在满足预定条件时变化。The transmission processing section 16 multiplexes the background image extracted by the background image extraction section 13, the object extracted by the object extraction section 14, and the additional information acquired by the additional information calculation section 15, and synthesizes them via the transmission path 3 at their data rates. The multiplexed data is sent to the receiving device 2. The sending processing part 16 receives the control information sent from the receiving device 2 via the transmission path 3, and controls the sending of background images, objects and additional information corresponding to the control information, so that the spatial resolution and time resolution of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 The rate changes when predetermined conditions are met.

下面结合图4所示的流程图简要地说明图3所示的发送设备1的处理。The processing of the sending device 1 shown in FIG. 3 will be briefly described below with reference to the flow chart shown in FIG. 4 .

图像输入部分11输出的图像供给预处理部分12。在步骤S1上,与处理部分12执行图像的预处理。换句话说,在步骤S1上,背景图像提取部分13或前景图像提取部分14从图像输入部分11输入的图像中分别提取背景图像或对象,并把提取的背景图像或提取的对象供应给发送处理部分16。此外,在步骤S1上,附加信息计算部分15从图像输入部分11输入的图像中获得上述的附加信息,并把获得的附加信息供应给发送处理部分16。发送处理部分16经传送路径3发送背景图像、前景图像和附加信息。此后,流程返回到步骤S1,发送设备1重复相似的处理。The image output from the image input section 11 is supplied to the preprocessing section 12 . At step S1, the processing section 12 performs preprocessing of the image. In other words, at step S1, the background image extracting section 13 or the foreground image extracting section 14 respectively extracts a background image or an object from the image input by the image input section 11, and supplies the extracted background image or the extracted object to the sending process Part 16. Further, at step S1 , the additional information calculation section 15 obtains the above-mentioned additional information from the image input by the image input section 11 , and supplies the obtained additional information to the transmission processing section 16 . The transmission processing section 16 transmits the background image, foreground image, and additional information via the transmission path 3 . Thereafter, the flow returns to step S1, and the transmitting device 1 repeats similar processing.

图5示出了图2所示的接收设备2的结构实例。FIG. 5 shows an example of the structure of the receiving device 2 shown in FIG. 2 .

发送设备1经传送路径3发送多路复用数据。该多路复用数据由接收处理部分21接收。接收处理部分21把该多路复用数据分离成背景图像、对象和附加信息,并把它们供应给组合处理部分22。The transmission device 1 transmits multiplexed data via the transmission path 3 . This multiplexed data is received by the reception processing section 21 . The reception processing section 21 separates the multiplexed data into background images, objects, and additional information, and supplies them to the combination processing section 22 .

组合处理部分22把从接收处理部分21接收的背景图像、对象和附加信息组合成原始图像,并把该合成的图像供应给图像输出部分23。组合处理部分22相应于下面将要说明的高分辨率信息等改变组合的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率。The combination processing section 22 combines the background image, object, and additional information received from the reception processing section 21 into an original image, and supplies the synthesized image to the image output section 23 . The combination processing section 22 changes the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the combined image corresponding to high-resolution information and the like to be described below.

图像输出部分23由例如液晶显示器或CRT组成。图像输出部分23显示从组合处理部分22输出的图像。The image output section 23 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display or a CRT. The image output section 23 displays the image output from the combination processing section 22 .

控制信息输入部分24把控制信息输出给组合处理部分22和控制信息发送部分25。换句话说,控制信息输入部分24组成按键部分2-3。控制信息输入部分24由例如诸如跟踪球的指点器组成。当用户用控制信息输入部分24指定一个由图像输出部分23显示的图像的特定位置时,控制信息输入部分24把该位置检测为用户正在考虑的一个考虑点,把该考虑点的坐标放入控制信息中,并输出所得的控制信息。另一方面,控制信息输入部分24由例如一个摄影机组成。当用户摄取和认可一个图像时,控制信息输入部分24把用户正在考虑的一个点检测为考虑点,把该考虑的点的坐标放入控制信息中,并输出该合成的控制信息。控制信息输入部分24可以被构造成使用户可以直接输入作为控制信息的由图像输出部分23显示的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率的结构。The control information input section 24 outputs the control information to the combination processing section 22 and the control information transmission section 25 . In other words, the control information input section 24 constitutes the key section 2-3. The control information input section 24 is composed of, for example, a pointing device such as a trackball. When the user designates a specific position of the image displayed by the image output part 23 with the control information input part 24, the control information input part 24 detects the position as a consideration point that the user is considering, and puts the coordinates of the consideration point into the control information, and output the resulting control information. On the other hand, the control information input section 24 is composed of, for example, a video camera. When the user takes and approves an image, the control information input section 24 detects a point that the user is considering as a considered point, puts the coordinates of the considered point into the control information, and outputs the synthesized control information. The control information input section 24 may be structured so that the user can directly input the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the image displayed by the image output section 23 as control information.

当控制信息发送部分25接收来自控制信息输入部分24的控制信息时,控制信息发送部分25经传送路径3向发送设备1发送控制信息。When the control information transmission section 25 receives the control information from the control information input section 24 , the control information transmission section 25 transmits the control information to the transmission device 1 via the transmission path 3 .

下面结合图6所示的流程图简要说明图5所示的接收设备2的处理。The processing of the receiving device 2 shown in FIG. 5 will be briefly described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 6 .

在接收设备2中,接收处理部分21经传送路径3接收来自发送设备1的多路复用数据。在步骤S11,接收处理部分21执行一个接收处理,将多路复用数据分离成背景图像、对象和附加信息。接收处理部分21向组合处理部分22供应作为接收处理结果的背景图像、对象和附加信息。在步骤S12,组合处理部分22把背景图像、对象和附加信息组合为原始图像并把该组成图像供应给图像输出部分23。图像输出部分23显示该组合图像。此后,流程返回到步骤S11,随后接收设备重复相似的处理。In the reception device 2 , the reception processing section 21 receives the multiplexed data from the transmission device 1 via the transmission path 3 . In step S11, the reception processing section 21 performs a reception process of separating the multiplexed data into background images, objects and additional information. The reception processing section 21 supplies the combination processing section 22 with a background image, an object, and additional information as a result of the reception processing. In step S12 , the combination processing section 22 combines the background image, the object, and the additional information into an original image and supplies the composed image to the image output section 23 . The image output section 23 displays the combined image. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S11, and then the receiving device repeats similar processing.

在接收设备2中,当用户用控制信息输入部分24指定一个图像输出部分23所显示的图像的考虑点时,该考虑点的坐标被放入控制信息中。该合成控制信息被供给控制信息发送部分25。控制信息发送部分25经传送路径3向发送设备1发送该控制信息。当发送设备1接收到如上所述的控制信息时,发送处理部分16控制背景图像、对象和附加信息的发送,使接收设备2所显示的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率可以在满足约定条件时改变。此后,由于已经被控制的背景图像、对象和附加信息从发送设备1发送到接收设备2,因此在满足一个预定条件时已改变了空间分辨率和时间分辨率的图像由接收设备2显示。In the receiving apparatus 2, when the user designates a point of consideration of an image displayed by the image output section 23 with the control information input section 24, the coordinates of the point of consideration are put into the control information. This synthesized control information is supplied to the control information transmission section 25 . The control information transmission section 25 transmits the control information to the transmission device 1 via the transmission path 3 . When the sending device 1 receives the above-mentioned control information, the sending processing part 16 controls the sending of background images, objects and additional information, so that the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 can meet the agreed conditions change from time to time. Thereafter, since the background image, object and additional information that have been controlled are transmitted from the transmitting device 1 to the receiving device 2, the image having changed spatial resolution and temporal resolution is displayed by the receiving device 2 when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

图7示出了图3所示的发送设备1的发送处理部分16的结构实例。FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the transmission processing section 16 of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 3 .

背景图像、对象和附加信息从预处理部分12(参见图3)供给编码部分31和控制部分35。编码部分31对背景图像、对象和附加信息编码,并把该合成的编码数据供应给MUX(多路复用器)32。MUX32在控制部分35的控制下选择从编码部分31接收的背景图像、对象和附加信息并把选择的编码数据作为多路复用数据供给发送部分33。发送部分33调制从MUX32接收的多路复用数据,并经传送路径3把该调制的数据发送给接收设备2。数据量计算部分34监视MUX32向发送部分33输出的多路复用数据,计算多路复用数据的数据速率,并把计算的数据速率供应给控制部分35。Background images, objects, and additional information are supplied from the preprocessing section 12 (see FIG. 3 ) to the encoding section 31 and the control section 35 . The encoding section 31 encodes a background image, an object, and additional information, and supplies the synthesized encoded data to a MUX (Multiplexer) 32 . The MUX 32 selects background images, objects and additional information received from the encoding section 31 under the control of the control section 35 and supplies the selected encoded data to the transmitting section 33 as multiplexed data. The transmitting section 33 modulates the multiplexed data received from the MUX 32 , and transmits the modulated data to the receiving device 2 via the transmission path 3 . The data amount calculation section 34 monitors the multiplexed data output from the MUX 32 to the transmission section 33 , calculates the data rate of the multiplexed data, and supplies the calculated data rate to the control section 35 .

控制部分35控制MUX32的多路复用数据的输出,使数据量计算部分34的数据速率不超过传送路径3的传送速率。此外,控制部分35经传送路径3接收从接收设备2发送的控制信息,并相应于该控制信息控制MUX32的编码数据的选择。The control section 35 controls the output of the multiplexed data of the MUX 32 so that the data rate of the data amount calculation section 34 does not exceed the transmission rate of the transmission path 3 . Further, the control section 35 receives control information transmitted from the receiving apparatus 2 via the transmission path 3, and controls selection of coded data of the MUX 32 corresponding to the control information.

图8示出了图7所示的编码部分31的结构实例。FIG. 8 shows an example of the structure of the coding section 31 shown in FIG. 7 .

背景图像被供应给差值计算部分41B。差值计算部分41从处理的当前帧(在下文中,该帧可以称作考虑帧)的背景图像中减去刚处理的在前帧的背景图像,并把背景图像的差值数据作为相减结果供应给分层编码部分42B。分层编码部分42B对从差值计算部分41B接收的背景图像的差值数据进行分层编码,并把编码结果提供给存储部分43B。存储部分43B临时存储从分层编码部分42接收的分层编码结果。存储部分43B中存储的分层编码结果作为背景图像的编码数据供应给MUX32(参见图7)。The background image is supplied to the difference calculation section 41B. The difference calculation section 41 subtracts the background image of the just-processed previous frame from the background image of the processed current frame (hereinafter, this frame may be referred to as a considered frame), and takes the difference data of the background image as the subtraction result It is supplied to the hierarchical encoding section 42B. The hierarchical encoding section 42B performs hierarchical encoding on the difference data of the background image received from the difference calculation section 41B, and supplies the encoded result to the storage section 43B. The storage section 43B temporarily stores the layered encoding result received from the layered encoding section 42 . The layered encoding result stored in the storage section 43B is supplied to the MUX 32 as encoded data of the background image (see FIG. 7 ).

存储部分43B中存储的分层编码结果供应给本地解码器44B。本地编码器44B把分层编码结果进行解码成为原始背景图像,并把解码的背景图像供应给差值计算部分部分41B。由本地解码器部分44B解码的背景图像由差值计算部分41B使用。差值计算部分41B使用解码的背景图像来获得下一帧的背景图像的差值数据。The layered encoding result stored in the storage section 43B is supplied to the local decoder 44B. The local encoder 44B decodes the layered encoding result into an original background image, and supplies the decoded background image to the difference calculation section 41B. The background image decoded by the local decoder section 44B is used by the difference calculation section 41B. The difference calculation section 41B uses the decoded background image to obtain difference data of the background image of the next frame.

对象被供应给差值计算部分41F。差值计算部分41F、分层编码部分42F、存储部分43F和本地解码器部分44F执行与上述的差值计算部分41B、分层编码部分42B、存储部分43B和本地解码器44B相同的处理。因而,按照与背景图像相同的方式,对象被分层编码并供应给MUX32(参见图7)。当存在多个对象时,差值计算部分41F、分层编码部分42F存储部分43F和本地解码部分44F以上述方式对多个对象分层编码。The objects are supplied to the difference calculation section 41F. Difference calculation section 41F, layered encoding section 42F, storage section 43F, and local decoder section 44F perform the same processing as difference calculation section 41B, layered encoding section 42B, storage section 43B, and local decoder 44B described above. Thus, in the same manner as the background image, the object is hierarchically coded and supplied to the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7). When there are a plurality of objects, the difference calculation section 41F, the hierarchical encoding section 42F, the storage section 43F, and the local decoding section 44F hierarchically encode the plurality of objects in the above-described manner.

附加信息提供给VLC(可变长度编码)部分45。VCL部分45按照可变长码编码方法对附加信息进行编码,并把编码的附加信息供应给MUX32(参见图7)。Additional information is provided to the VLC (Variable Length Coding) section 45 . The VCL section 45 encodes the additional information according to the variable length code encoding method, and supplies the encoded additional information to the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7).

下面结合附图9将说明由图8所示的编码部分31所执行的分层编码/解码。Layered encoding/decoding performed by the encoding section 31 shown in FIG. 8 will be described below with reference to FIG. 9. FIG.

假定较低层次的2×2像素(水平×垂直)的四个像素的平均值被视为较高层次的一个像素(像素值),并且假定按三个层次级对一个图像编码。在这种情况下,对于考虑到如图9(A)所示的8×8个像素的最低层次级中的一个图像,计算2×2个像素的左上部分的四个像素h00、h01、h02和h03的平均值m0。该平均值被m0视作第二层次级的左上部分的一个像素。计算最低层次级的右上部分的四个像素h10、h11、h12和h13的平均值m1。计算最低层次级的左下部分的四个像素h20、h21、h22和h23的平均值m2。计算最低层次级的右上部分的四个像素h30、h31、h32和h33的平均值m3。平均值m1、m2和m3被分别视作第二层次级的右上部分、左下部分和右上部分上的像素。此外,计算第二层次级的2×2像素的四个像素m0、m1、m2和m3的平均值q。该平均值被视作是最高层次级的第三层次级的一个象素。It is assumed that an average value of four pixels of 2×2 pixels (horizontal×vertical) of the lower hierarchy is regarded as one pixel (pixel value) of the higher hierarchy, and it is assumed that one image is encoded in three hierarchical levels. In this case, for an image in the lowest hierarchical level considering 8×8 pixels as shown in FIG. 9(A), four pixels h00, h01, h02 of the upper left portion of 2×2 pixels are calculated and the mean m0 of h03. This average value is considered by m0 to be a pixel in the upper left portion of the second hierarchical level. The average value m1 of the four pixels h10, h11, h12, and h13 of the upper right portion of the lowest hierarchical level is calculated. The mean value m2 of the four pixels h20, h21, h22, and h23 of the lower left portion of the lowest hierarchical level is calculated. The average value m3 of the four pixels h30, h31, h32, and h33 of the upper right portion of the lowest hierarchical level is calculated. Mean values m1, m2, and m3 are regarded as pixels on the upper right portion, lower left portion, and upper right portion of the second hierarchical level, respectively. Furthermore, an average value q of four pixels m0, m1, m2, and m3 of 2×2 pixels of the second hierarchical level is calculated. The average value is regarded as a pixel of the third hierarchical level of the highest hierarchical level.

根据上述的分层编码,最高层次级中的图像的空间分辨率是最低的。图像的空间分辨率与层次级成反比。换句话说,最低层次级中的图像的空间分辨率是最高的。According to the hierarchical coding described above, the spatial resolution of the images in the highest hierarchical level is the lowest. The spatial resolution of an image is inversely proportional to the level of hierarchy. In other words, the spatial resolution of the images in the lowest hierarchical level is the highest.

在所有象素h00至h03、h10至h13、h20至h23、h30至h33、m0至m3和q被发送的情形下的数据量大于仅由较高层次级的象素m0至m3和q发送最低层次级的图像情形下的数据量。The amount of data in the case where all pixels h00 to h03, h10 to h13, h20 to h23, h30 to h33, m0 to m3, and q are transmitted is larger than the lowest pixel transmitted only by pixels m0 to m3 and q of a higher hierarchical level. The amount of data in the case of hierarchical images.

因此,如图9(B)所示,第三层次级的象素q被发送,而不是例如第二层次级的象素m0至m3的右下位置上的像素m3被发送。Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9(B), the pixel q of the third hierarchical level is transmitted instead of the pixel m3 at the lower right position of the pixels m0 to m3 of the second hierarchical level, for example.

此外,如图9(C)所示,发送第二层次级的象素m0,而不是发送例如最低层次级的象素m0至m3的右下位置上的像素h03。同样,第二层次级的剩余像素m1、m2和q被发送,而不是发送第一层次级的象素h13、h23和h33。尽管像素q不是第二层次级的一个像素,但它被发送,而不是发送直接从像素h30至h33得到的像素m3。因而,发送像素q,而不是发送替代像素h33的像素m3。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9(C), the pixel m0 of the second hierarchical level is transmitted instead of, for example, the pixel h03 at the lower right position of the pixels m0 to m3 of the lowest hierarchical level. Likewise, the remaining pixels m1, m2 and q of the second hierarchical level are transmitted instead of the pixels h13, h23 and h33 of the first hierarchical level. Although pixel q is not a pixel of the second hierarchical level, it is transmitted instead of pixel m3 obtained directly from pixels h30 to h33. Thus, pixel q is sent instead of pixel m3 instead of pixel h33.

因而,如图9(C)所示,发送的像素数目变成4×4像素=16像素。因此发送的像素数目相同于仅仅发送图9(A)所示的最低层次级的象素的情况。在这种情况下,发送的数据量可以避免增加。Thus, as shown in FIG. 9(C), the number of transmitted pixels becomes 4×4 pixels=16 pixels. The number of pixels transmitted is therefore the same as in the case of transmitting only pixels of the lowest hierarchical level shown in FIG. 9(A). In this case, the amount of data sent can be avoided from increasing.

替代像素q发送的像素m3以及替代像素m0至m3发送的像素h03、h13、h23和h33可以按下述方式被解码。The pixel m3 transmitted instead of the pixel q and the pixels h03 , h13 , h23 , and h33 transmitted instead of the pixels m0 to m3 can be decoded as follows.

换言之,由于q是m0至m3的平均值,因此满足等式q=(m0+m1+m2+m3)/4。因此可以相应于等式m3=4×q-(m0+m1+m2)用第三层次级的象素q和第二层次级的象素m0至m2获得(解码)第二层次级的象素m3。In other words, since q is the average value of m0 to m3, the equation q=(m0+m1+m2+m3)/4 is satisfied. Therefore, the pixels of the second hierarchical level can be obtained (decoded) using the pixel q of the third hierarchical level and the pixels m0 to m2 of the second hierarchical level corresponding to the equation m3=4×q-(m0+m1+m2) m3.

此外,由于m0是h00至h03的平均值,因此满足等式m0=(h00+h01+h02+h03)/4。因此,相应于等式h03=4×m0-(h00+h01+h02),可以用第二层次级的象素m0和第一层次级的象素h00至h02获得第一层次级的象素h03。按相同的方式,可以获得h13、h23和h33。Furthermore, since m0 is an average value of h00 to h03, the equation m0=(h00+h01+h02+h03)/4 is satisfied. Therefore, corresponding to the equation h03=4*m0-(h00+h01+h02), the pixel h03 of the first hierarchy level can be obtained with the pixel m0 of the second hierarchy level and the pixels h00 to h02 of the first hierarchy level . In the same way, h13, h23 and h33 can be obtained.

因此,在未在一个特定层次级中发送的像素可以用该层次级中发送的像素和上一级的层次级的一个像素来解码。Therefore, a pixel not transmitted in a particular hierarchical level can be decoded with a pixel transmitted in that hierarchical level and a pixel of a hierarchical level one level above.

下面将结合图10所示的流程图说明图7所示的发送处理部分16的发送处理。The transmission processing of the transmission processing section 16 shown in FIG. 7 will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 10 .

在步骤S21,在发送处理部分16中,控制部分35确定接收设备2是否已经发送控制信号。当步骤S21的确定结果表明控制信号还未从接收设备2发送(即,控制部分35还未接收到该控制信息)时,流程前进到步骤S22。控制部分35控制MUX32选择背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据,并多路复用它们,以使接收设备2可以用正常的时间分辨率(例如,一个默认时间分辨率)显示一个图像。In step S21, in the transmission processing section 16, the control section 35 determines whether the receiving device 2 has transmitted a control signal. When the determined result of step S21 indicates that the control signal has not been transmitted from the receiving device 2 (ie, the control section 35 has not received the control information), the flow proceeds to step S22. The control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to select coded data of background images, objects, and additional information, and multiplex them so that the receiving device 2 can display an image with a normal time resolution (for example, a default time resolution).

当正常的时间分辨率是例如30帧/秒时,MUX32选择背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据,多路复用该编码数据,和输出该多路复用的数据,以使该图像用按传送路径3的传送速率发送多路复用数据的最大时间分辨率来显示。When the normal temporal resolution is, for example, 30 frames/second, MUX 32 selects coded data of a background image, an object, and additional information, multiplexes the coded data, and outputs the multiplexed data so that the image is Displays the maximum time resolution of multiplexed data transmitted at the transmission rate of transmission path 3.

实际上,例如,在按三个层次级执行分层编码的情况中,当(只有)第三层次级的数据以传送路径3的传送速率发送时,选择背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据以显示第三层次级的图像。因此,在这种情况下,接收设备2用是原始图像(第一层次级)的1/4(水平方向和垂直方向)的空间分辨率和30帧/秒的时间分辨率来显示一个图像。Actually, for example, in the case of performing hierarchical encoding by three hierarchical levels, when (only) the data of the third hierarchical level is transmitted at the transmission rate of the transmission path 3, the encoded data of the background image, object, and additional information are selected to display the image of the third level hierarchy. Therefore, in this case, the receiving device 2 displays an image with a spatial resolution (horizontal direction and vertical direction) of 1/4 (horizontal direction and vertical direction) and a temporal resolution of 30 frames/second which are 1/4 of the original image (first hierarchical level).

此后,流程前进到步骤S23。在步骤S23,发送部分33发送MUX32经传送路径3输出的多路复用数据。此后,步骤返回到步骤S21。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S23. In step S23 , the transmission section 33 transmits the multiplexed data output by the MUX 32 via the transmission path 3 . Thereafter, the step returns to step S21.

当步骤S21上的确定结果表明控制信号已经从接收设备2发送(即,控制部分35已经接收到该控制信息)时,流程前进到步骤S24。控制部分35相应于控制信号操纵控制信息输入部分24,从而认可指定的考虑点。此后,流程前进到步骤S25。When the determined result at step S21 indicates that the control signal has been transmitted from the receiving device 2 (ie, the control section 35 has received the control information), the flow proceeds to step S24. The control section 35 manipulates the control information input section 24 corresponding to the control signal, thereby approving the designated point of consideration. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S25.

在步骤S25,控制部分35把具有一个考虑点(矩形框具有在帧水平方向和垂直方向的平行边并且考虑点在矩形框的重心上)周围预定尺寸的矩形那样的区域指定为一个优先权范围,在该范围中用优先权改善空间分辨率并且检测在该优先权范围中组成图像的背景图像、对象和附加信息。In step S25, the control section 35 designates an area like a rectangle having a predetermined size around a consideration point (the rectangular frame has parallel sides in the frame horizontal direction and the vertical direction and the consideration point is on the center of gravity of the rectangular frame) as a priority range , in which priority is used to improve the spatial resolution and to detect background images, objects and additional information that make up the image in this priority range.

此后,流程前进到步骤S26。在步骤S26,控制部分35控制MUX32选择和多路复用背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据,并多路复用被选择的编码数据以使接收设备2可以用较高的时间分辨率显示该优先权范围内的图像。Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S26. In step S26, the control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to select and multiplex the coded data of the background image, the object, and the additional information, and multiplexes the selected coded data so that the receiving device 2 can display with a higher temporal resolution. Images within this priority range.

换言之,当控制部分35接收来自接收设备2的控制信号时,控制部分35控制MUX32以牺牲时间分辨率为代价来改善优先权范围内的图像的空间分辨率。In other words, when the control section 35 receives the control signal from the receiving device 2, the control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to improve the spatial resolution of images within the priority range at the expense of temporal resolution.

因此,MUX32用优先权选择显示第三层次级的图像和第二层次级的图像所需的背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据,多路复用被选择的编码数据和输出该多路复用的数据。Therefore, the MUX 32 selects with priority the coded data of the background image, object, and additional information required to display the image of the third hierarchical level and the image of the second hierarchical level, multiplexes the selected coded data and outputs the multiplexed data. used data.

此外,在步骤S26,控制部分35控制MUX32把优先权范围、大小等等的位置信息插入到选作多路复用数据的附加信息中。此后,流程前进到步骤S23。Furthermore, at step S26, the control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to insert positional information of the priority range, size, etc. into the additional information selected as the multiplexed data. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S23.

在步骤S23,如上述的那样,发送部分33发送MUX32经传送路径3输出的多路复用数据。此后,流程返回到步骤S21。In step S23, the transmission section 33 transmits the multiplexed data output by the MUX 32 via the transmission path 3 as described above. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S21.

为简单起见,假定在步骤S26上对于作为非优先权范围中的一个图像的第三层次级的一个图像连续选择显示第三层次级的图像的背景信息、对象和附加信息的编码数据,被多路复用的数据量大于在步骤S22上的优先权范围内的图像的第二层次级的数据的情形。根据本发明的实施例,按照上述的方式以30帧/秒显示图像,则仅以传送路径3的传送速率发送第三层次级的数据。这样就不能发送步骤S26上获得的多路复用数据,以便按30帧/秒显示图像。从而,在步骤S23的极端情况下,在步骤S26上获得的多路复用数据用0帧/秒的时间分辨率发送。For the sake of simplicity, assume that on step S26, for an image of the third hierarchical level as an image in the non-priority range, the coded data of background information, objects and additional information of the image of the third hierarchical level are continuously selected and displayed, which is multiplied The case where the multiplexed data amount is larger than the data of the second hierarchical level of the image within the priority range at step S22. According to the embodiment of the present invention, if the image is displayed at 30 frames per second in the above manner, only the data of the third level is transmitted at the transmission rate of the transmission path 3 . This makes it impossible to transmit the multiplexed data obtained at step S26 to display images at 30 frames/second. Thus, in the extreme case of step S23, the multiplexed data obtained at step S26 is transmitted with a time resolution of 0 frame/second.

因此,在这种情况下,对于优先权范围内的图像,接收设备2所显示图像的水平方向和垂直方向每个的空间分辨率为原始图像(即第一层次级)空间分辨率的1/2。换句话说,接收设备2显示其水平方向和垂直方向每个的空间分辨率二倍于第三层次级的图像空间分辨率的图像(第二层次级)。然而,其时间分辨率为0帧/秒。换言之,接收设备2显示一个静止图像。Therefore, in this case, for images within the priority range, the spatial resolution of each of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 is 1/1 of the spatial resolution of the original image (that is, the first hierarchical level). 2. In other words, the reception device 2 displays an image (second hierarchical level) whose spatial resolution in each of the horizontal direction and vertical direction is twice the spatial resolution of the image in the third hierarchical level. However, its temporal resolution is 0 frames per second. In other words, the receiving device 2 displays a still image.

在发送用于优先权范围内图像的第二层次级的数据之后,当步骤S21的确定结果表明已经再次从接收设备2发送(即,用户连续操作控制信息输入部分24并指定相同的考虑点)控制信号时,流程前进到步骤S24。在步骤S24,控制部分35认可该相同的考虑点。此后,流程前进到步骤S25。在步骤S25,控制部分35指定相同的优先权范围。此后,流程前进到步骤S26。After transmitting the data of the second hierarchical level for the image within the priority range, when the determined result of step S21 indicates that it has been transmitted again from the receiving device 2 (that is, the user continuously operates the control information input section 24 and designates the same point of consideration) control signal, the flow proceeds to step S24. In step S24, the control section 35 recognizes the same point of consideration. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S25. In step S25, the control section 35 designates the same priority range. Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S26.

在步骤S26,控制部分35控制MUX32选择背景图像、对象、和附加信息的编码数据和多路复用该选择的编码数据,以使接收设备2可以显示具有较高空间分辨率的优先权范围内的图像。In step S26, the control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to select the coded data of the background image, the object, and the additional information and multiplex the selected coded data, so that the receiving device 2 can display the images within the priority range with a higher spatial resolution. Image.

在这种情况下,对于优先权范围内的图像,用优先权选择第三层次级和第二层次级的背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据。在这种情况下,用优先权选择第一层次级的背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据,并按多路复用数据输出。此外,在步骤S26,如上所述,高分辨率信息被插入附加信息中。此后,流程前进到步骤S23。在步骤S23,发送部分33发送MUX32经传送路径3输出的多路复用数据。此后,流程前进到步骤S21。In this case, for the images within the priority range, the encoded data of background images, objects, and additional information of the third hierarchical level and the second hierarchical level are selected with priority. In this case, the coded data of the background image, object and additional information of the first hierarchical level are selected with priority and output as multiplexed data. Furthermore, at step S26, as described above, high-resolution information is inserted into the additional information. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S23. In step S23 , the transmission section 33 transmits the multiplexed data output by the MUX 32 via the transmission path 3 . Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S21.

因此,在这种情况下,对于优先权范围内的图像,接收设备2显示具有与原始图像(第一层次级)相同的空间分辨率的图像。换句话说,接收设备2显示具有四倍于第三层次级的图像的空间分辨率(水平方向和垂直方向的每个中的)的图像。然而,时间分辨率例如为0帧/秒。换言之,接收设备2显示一个静止图像。Therefore, in this case, for the images within the priority range, the receiving device 2 displays an image having the same spatial resolution as the original image (first hierarchical level). In other words, the reception device 2 displays an image having a spatial resolution (in each of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction) four times that of the image of the third hierarchical level. However, the temporal resolution is, for example, 0 frames/second. In other words, the receiving device 2 displays a still image.

因而,当用户连续操作控制信息输入部分24和指定相同的考虑点时,对于含有该考虑点的优先权范围内的图像,以图像的时间分辨率为代价借助优先权发送改善了空间分辨率的数据。因而,尽管图像的时间分辨率恶化,但含有考虑点的优先权内的图像的空间分辨率得到了改善。因此,优选权范围内的图像被更加清楚地显示。换句话说,用户考虑的部分的图像被更加清楚地显示。Thus, when the user continuously operates the control information input section 24 and designates the same point of consideration, for images within the priority range containing the point of consideration, the spatial resolution is improved by priority transmission at the expense of the temporal resolution of the image. data. Thus, although the temporal resolution of the images deteriorates, the spatial resolution of the images within the priorities containing the consideration points is improved. Therefore, images within the priority range are displayed more clearly. In other words, the image of the portion considered by the user is displayed more clearly.

因此,图像数据的发送被控制,以使含有一个考虑点的特定优先权范围内的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率在按传送路径3传送速率发送的图像数据的分辨率范围内变化。换句话说,图像数据的发送被控制,以使优先权范围内的图像的空间分辨率得到改善和使该图像的时间分辨率恶化。因而,借助于按传送路径3的传送速率发送的图像数据获得改善的空间分辨率分辨率和恶化的时间分辨率。结果,在一个限制的传输速率上,接收设备2所显示的图像的空间分辨率可以进一步得到改善。Therefore, the transmission of the image data is controlled so that the spatial resolution and the temporal resolution of the image within a certain priority range including a point of consideration are varied within the resolution range of the image data transmitted at the transmission rate of the transmission path 3 . In other words, the transmission of image data is controlled so that the spatial resolution of the image within the priority range is improved and the temporal resolution of the image is deteriorated. Thus, an improved spatial resolution and a worsened temporal resolution are obtained by means of the image data transmitted at the transmission rate of the transmission path 3 . As a result, the spatial resolution of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 can be further improved at a limited transmission rate.

下面图11示出了图5所示的接收处理部分21的结构实例。FIG. 11 below shows a configuration example of the reception processing section 21 shown in FIG. 5 .

接收部分51经传送路径3接收多路复用的数据。在多路复用数据被解调后,供给DMUX(解复用器)52。DMUX52把从接收部分51接收的多路复用数据分解成背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据,和把分解的数据供应给解码部分53。解码部分53把背景图像、对象和附加信息的编码数据解码成它们的原始数据并输送给组合处理部分22(参见图5)。The reception section 51 receives the multiplexed data via the transmission path 3 . After the multiplexed data is demodulated, it is supplied to a DMUX (Demultiplexer) 52 . The DMUX 52 decomposes the multiplexed data received from the receiving section 51 into encoded data of background images, objects, and additional information, and supplies the decomposed data to the decoding section 53 . The decoding section 53 decodes the coded data of the background image, objects, and additional information into their original data and supplies to the combination processing section 22 (see FIG. 5).

换言之,图12示出了图11所示的解码部分53的结构实例。In other words, FIG. 12 shows a structural example of the decoding section 53 shown in FIG. 11 .

作为背景图像的编码数据的分层编码差值数据被供应给加法装置61B。此外,已经解码并存储在存储部分62B中的前一帧的一个背景图像也送给加法装置61B。加法装置61B将背景图像的差值数据和自存储部分62B接收的前一帧的背景图像相加,以便对一个预期层次级的背景图像进行解码。该解码的背景图像被供应给存储部分62B。存储部分62B存储从加法装置61B接收的背景图像。该解码的背景图像被供应给加法装置61B和组合处理部分22(参见图5)。The layered-encoded difference data, which is encoded data of the background image, is supplied to the adding device 61B. In addition, a background image of the previous frame which has been decoded and stored in the storage section 62B is also supplied to the adding means 61B. The adding means 61B adds the difference data of the background image and the background image of the previous frame received from the storage section 62B to decode a background image of a desired hierarchical level. This decoded background image is supplied to the storage section 62B. The storage section 62B stores the background image received from the adding device 61B. This decoded background image is supplied to the adding device 61B and the combination processing section 22 (see FIG. 5 ).

作为对象编码数据的分层编码差值数据被供应给加法器61F。加法装置61F和存储部分62F执行与加法装置61B和存储部分62B相似的处理。从而,按照与背景图像相同的方式,把对象的差值数据解码为预期的层次级的对象,然后供应给组合处理部分22(参见图5)。当存在多个对象时,加法部分61F和存储部分62F对多个对象的差值数据进行解码(分层解码)。The hierarchically encoded difference data as object encoded data is supplied to the adder 61F. The addition device 61F and the storage section 62F perform similar processing to the addition device 61B and the storage section 62B. Thus, in the same manner as the background image, difference data of objects is decoded into objects of desired hierarchical levels, and then supplied to the combination processing section 22 (see FIG. 5 ). When there are a plurality of objects, the addition section 61F and the storage section 62F decode difference data of the plurality of objects (hierarchical decoding).

作为附加信息编码数据的用可变长度码编码的附加信息被供应给反向VLC部分63。反向VLC部分63用可变长度编码对该附加信息进行解码。从而获得原始附加信息,并供应给组合处理部分22。Additional information encoded with a variable length code is supplied to the reverse VLC section 63 as additional information encoded data. The reverse VLC section 63 decodes the additional information with variable length coding. The original additional information is thereby obtained, and supplied to the combination processing section 22 .

图8所示的本地解码器44B被构成为加法装置61B和存储部分62B。同样,本地解码器44F被构成为加法装置61F和存储部分62F。The local decoder 44B shown in FIG. 8 is constituted as an adding means 61B and a storage section 62B. Also, the local decoder 44F is constituted as an adding means 61F and a storage section 62F.

图13示出了图5所示的组合处理部分22的结构实例。FIG. 13 shows a structural example of the combination processing section 22 shown in FIG. 5 .

解码部分53输出的背景图像(参见图1)被供应给背景图像写入部分71。解码部分53输出的对象被供应给对象写入部分72。解码部分53输出的附加信息被供应给背景图像写入部分71、对象写入部分72和组合部分77。The background image (see FIG. 1 ) output by the decoding section 53 is supplied to the background image writing section 71 . The object output by the decoding section 53 is supplied to the object writing section 72 . The additional information output by the decoding section 53 is supplied to the background image writing section 71 , the object writing section 72 and the combining section 77 .

背景图像写入部分71连续地把背景图像写入背景图像存储器73。当一个图像是在摄像机摇镜头或倾斜情况下拍摄的时,背景图像是移动的。在此点,背景图像写入部分定位该背景图像,然后把定位的背景图像写入背景图像存储器73。因此,背景图像存储器73可以存储一个在空间上宽于一帧的图像的图像。背景图像是相应于包含在附加信息中的一个背景图像移动矢量来定位背景图像的。The background image writing section 71 continuously writes the background image into the background image memory 73 . When an image is captured with the camera panned or tilted, the background image moves. At this point, the background image writing section locates the background image, and then writes the positioned background image into the background image memory 73 . Therefore, the background image memory 73 can store an image that is spatially wider than an image of one frame. The background image is positioned corresponding to a background image movement vector included in the additional information.

当背景图像写入部分71把具有高空间分辨率的背景图像写入背景图像存储器73时,背景图像写入部分71相应于从0至1的背景图像的像素来改变按背景图像标志存储器74的地址所存储的背景图像标志的数值。当背景图像写入部分71把一个背景图像写入背景图像存储器73时,背景图像写入部分71核对背景图像标记存储器74。背景图像写入部分71不将一个具有低空间分辨率的背景图像写入其背景图像标志是1(表明该像素存储具有高空间分辨率的一个背景图像)的一个像素上。因而,大体上,不论背景图像何时供应给背景图像写入部分71,都被写入到背景图像存储器73。然而,背景图像写入部分71并不把具有低空间分辨率的背景图像写入到存储具有高空间分辨率的背景图像的像素上。结果,无论高空间分辨率的背景图像何时供应给背景背景图像写入部分71,都使高空间分辨率的范围在背景图像存储器内变宽。When the background image writing section 71 writes a background image with a high spatial resolution into the background image memory 73, the background image writing section 71 changes the value of the background image flag memory 74 corresponding to the pixels of the background image from 0 to 1. Address stores the value of the background image flag. When the background image writing section 71 writes a background image into the background image memory 73 , the background image writing section 71 checks the background image flag memory 74 . The background image writing section 71 does not write a background image with low spatial resolution on a pixel whose background image flag is 1 (indicating that the pixel stores a background image with high spatial resolution). Thus, basically, whenever a background image is supplied to the background image writing section 71 , it is written to the background image memory 73 . However, the background image writing section 71 does not write the background image with low spatial resolution on the pixels storing the background image with high spatial resolution. As a result, whenever a background image of high spatial resolution is supplied to the background background image writing section 71, the range of high spatial resolution is widened within the background image memory.

对象写入部分72连续地把所供给的对象写入到对象存储器75上。当存在多个对象时,对象写入部分72把每个对象写入到对象存储器75。当对象写入部分72把相同的对象(分配相同的标志)写入到对象存储器75时,对象写入部分72用新对象(新近供应给对象写入部分72的对象)替代旧对象。The object writing section 72 continuously writes the supplied objects onto the object memory 75 . When there are a plurality of objects, the object writing section 72 writes each object to the object memory 75 . When the object writing section 72 writes the same object (allocated with the same flag) to the object memory 75, the object writing section 72 replaces the old object with a new object (an object newly supplied to the object writing section 72).

此外,当对象写入部分72把高空间分辨率的一个对象写入到对象存储器75时,对象写入部分72相应于从0到1的对象的像素改变按对象标识存储器76的一个地址存储的一个背景图像标志。当对象写入部分72把对象写入到对象存储器75时,对象写入部分72核对对象标志存储器76。对象写入部分72不把具有低空间分辨率的对象写入到存储高空间分辨率的对象(对象标志=1)的对象存储器75上。以背景图像存储器73相同的方式,无论对象何时供给对象写入部分72,都将该对象写入到对象写入部分72。然而,对象写入部分72不把低空间分辨率的对象写入到存储高空间分辨率的对象的一个象素上。结果,无论高空间分辨率的对象何时被供应给对象写入部分72,高空间分辨率的对象的数目在对象存储器75中递增。In addition, when the object writing section 72 writes an object of high spatial resolution into the object memory 75, the object writing section 72 changes the pixel value stored in an address of the object identification memory 76 corresponding to the object from 0 to 1. A background image flag. When the object writing section 72 writes an object into the object memory 75 , the object writing section 72 checks the object flag memory 76 . The object writing section 72 does not write an object with a low spatial resolution on the object memory 75 storing an object (object flag=1) with a high spatial resolution. In the same manner as the background image memory 73 , whenever an object is supplied to the object writing section 72 , the object is written to the object writing section 72 . However, the object writing section 72 does not write an object of low spatial resolution to a pixel storing an object of high spatial resolution. As a result, whenever an object of high spatial resolution is supplied to the object writing section 72 , the number of objects of high spatial resolution is incremented in the object memory 75 .

背景图像存储器73存储从背景图像写入部分71供应的背景图像。背景图像标志存储器74按背景图像存储器73的一个地址存储上述的一比特背景图像标志。背景图像标志存储器74表示高空间分辨率的背景图像是否已经被存储在背景图像存储器73的一个地址上。对象存储器75至少包括一个存储从对象写入部分72供给的每个对象的存储器部分。对象标志存储器部分76存储上述的一比特对象标志,该标志代表一个高空间分辨率的对象是否已经存储在对象存储器75中。The background image memory 73 stores the background image supplied from the background image writing section 71 . The background image flag memory 74 stores the above-mentioned one-bit background image flag according to one address of the background image memory 73 . The background image flag memory 74 indicates whether a background image of high spatial resolution has been stored at an address of the background image memory 73 or not. The object memory 75 includes at least one memory section for storing each object supplied from the object writing section 72 . The object flag memory section 76 stores the above-mentioned one-bit object flag representing whether an object of high spatial resolution has been stored in the object memory 75 or not.

在这种情况下,为简单起见,背景图像标志和对象标志是一比特标志。另一方面,背景图像标志和对象标志可以是多比特标志。在此情况下,背景图像标志和对象标志可以代表多等级分辨率。换句话说,一比特标志只代表高分辨率和低分辨率这两个等级。然而,一个多比特标志代表多等级分辨率。In this case, for simplicity, the background image flag and the object flag are one-bit flags. Alternatively, the background image flag and the object flag may be multi-bit flags. In this case, background image flags and object flags can represent multi-level resolutions. In other words, a one-bit flag represents only two levels, high resolution and low resolution. However, a multi-bit flag represents multiple levels of resolution.

组合部分77相应于附加信息中含有的一个背景图像移动矢量读出背景图像存储器73中存储的当前帧(该帧可以被称之为考虑帧)的背景图像。此外,组合部分77相应于附加信息中含有的一个对象移动矢量来组合该背景图像和对象存储器75中存储的一个对象。结果,组合部分77生成一个考虑帧的图像,并把该图像供给一个显示存储器78。The combining section 77 reads out the background image of the current frame (this frame may be referred to as a considered frame) stored in the background image memory 73 corresponding to a background image movement vector contained in the additional information. Furthermore, the combining section 77 combines the background image and an object stored in the object memory 75 corresponding to an object movement vector contained in the additional information. As a result, the combining section 77 generates an image in consideration of the frame, and supplies the image to a display memory 78 .

此外,组合部分77接收来自控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)的控制信息时,组合部分77从对象存储器75中读出该控制信息中含有的考虑点上的一个对象,并把该对象供给子窗口存储器79。Furthermore, when the combination section 77 receives control information from the control information input section 24 (see FIG. 5), the combination section 77 reads out an object at the point of consideration contained in the control information from the object memory 75, and supplies the object to Child window memory 79 .

显示存储器78作为一个所谓的VRAM(视频只读存储器)。显示存储器78暂时存储组合部分77供给的考虑帧的图像。The display memory 78 functions as a so-called VRAM (Video Read Only Memory). The display memory 78 temporarily stores the image of the considered frame supplied from the combining section 77 .

子窗口存储器79暂时存储组合部分77供给的一个对象。The sub-window memory 79 temporarily stores an object supplied from the combining section 77 .

叠加部分80读出显示存储器78的存储内容,并把存储的内容供给图像输出部分23(参见图5)。图像输出部分23显示该存储的内容。必要时,叠加部分80打开图像输出部分23上的子窗口(下文将进行说明),读出子窗口存储器79的存储内容,并在该子窗口上显示该内容。The superimposing section 80 reads out the stored content of the display memory 78, and supplies the stored content to the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5). The image output section 23 displays the stored content. When necessary, the superimposing section 80 opens a sub-window (to be described later) on the image output section 23, reads out the stored content of the sub-window memory 79, and displays the content on the sub-window.

下面,结合图14将说明图13所示的组合处理部分22所执行的处理(组合处理)。Next, processing (combining processing) performed by the combining processing section 22 shown in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 .

首先,在步骤S31,背景图像写入部分71或对象写入部分72分别相应于背景图像标志存储器74以上述方式所存储的背景图像标志或对象标志存储器75以上述方式所存储的对象标志将解码部分53(参见图12)供给的一个背景图像或一个对象写入相关存储器。First, in step S31, the background image writing part 71 or the object writing part 72 respectively correspond to the background image flag stored in the above-mentioned manner in the background image flag memory 74 or the object flag stored in the above-mentioned manner in the object flag memory 75. A background image or an object supplied by section 53 (see Fig. 12) is written into the associated memory.

换言之,背景图像写入部分71核对背景图像标志存储器74,并且把供给的背景图像写入到背景图像存储器73的该地址上,此时与该地址相对应的象素的背景图像标志为0。相反,如果供给的背景图像的空间分辨很高时,背景图像写入部分71把该背景图像写入背景图像存储器73的一个地址上,此时对应该地址的象素的背景图像标志为1。In other words, the background image writing part 71 checks the background image flag memory 74, and writes the supplied background image to the address of the background image memory 73, and the background image flag of the pixel corresponding to the address is 0 at this moment. On the contrary, if the spatial resolution of the supplied background image is very high, the background image writing part 71 writes the background image into an address of the background image memory 73, and the background image flag of the pixel corresponding to the address is 1 at this moment.

同样,当对象存储器75的对象标志为0时,对象写入部分72将供给的对象写入到对象存储器75。当对象存储器75的对象标志为1时,如果供给的对象的空间分辨率很高时,对象写入部分72将供给的对象写入到对象存储器75。Also, when the object flag of the object memory 75 is 0, the object writing section 72 writes the supplied object to the object memory 75 . When the object flag of the object memory 75 is 1, the object writing section 72 writes the supplied object into the object memory 75 if the spatial resolution of the supplied object is high.

当背景图像写入部分71将背景图像写入到背景图像存储器73的一个特定地址时,如果该地址已经存储了一个背景图像,则背景图像写入部分71将该背景图像覆盖写到该地址上。该处理也适用于对象存储器75。When the background image writing part 71 writes the background image into a specific address of the background image memory 73, if a background image has been stored at this address, then the background image writing part 71 overwrites the background image on the address . This processing also applies to the object memory 75 .

此后,流程前进到步骤S32。在步骤S32,背景图像写入部分71和对象写入部分72确定附加信息是否含有高分辨率信息。当步骤S32上的确定结果表明附加信息含有高分辨率信息(即,用户已经操作控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)、合成控制信息已经发送给发送设备,以及发送设备1随后已经为优先权范围内的一个图像发送高空间分辨率的一个背景图像和一个对象)时,流程前进到步骤S33。在步骤S33,背景图像写入部分71或对象写入部分72将背景图像标志存储器74的背景图像标志或对象标志存储器76的对象标志改变为1。Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S32. In step S32, the background image writing section 71 and the object writing section 72 determine whether the additional information contains high-resolution information. When the determined result at step S32 shows that the additional information contains high-resolution information (that is, the user has operated the control information input section 24 (see FIG. When an image within the range sends a background image and an object with high spatial resolution), the flow proceeds to step S33. In step S33 , the background image writing section 71 or the object writing section 72 changes the background image flag of the background image flag memory 74 or the object flag of the object flag memory 76 to 1.

换句话说,当发送设备1为优先权范围内的一个图像发送具有高空间分辨率的一个背景图像和一个对象时,在步骤S31,背景图像写入部分71和对象写入部分72将具有高空间分辨率的背景图像和对象分别写入背景图像存储器73和对象存储器75。因而,在步骤S33,组成具有高空间分辨率的背景图像和对象的一个象素的背景图像标志和对象标志被改变为1。In other words, when the transmitting device 1 transmits a background image and an object with high spatial resolution for an image within the priority range, in step S31, the background image writing section 71 and the object writing section 72 will have high spatial resolution. The background image and objects at spatial resolution are written to background image memory 73 and object memory 75, respectively. Thus, at step S33, the background image flag and the object flag of one pixel constituting the background image and the object with high spatial resolution are changed to 1.

此后,流程前进到步骤S34。组合部分77从对象存储器75中读出优先权范围内的一个对象,并把该对象写入子窗口存储器79。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S34. The combination section 77 reads out an object within the priority range from the object memory 75 and writes the object into the sub-window memory 79 .

换句话说,当步骤S32上的确定结果表明附加信息含有高分辨率信息时,则表示用户已经操作了控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)、控制信息已经被发送给发送设备1、以及发送设备1随后为优先权范围内的一个图像已经发送具有高分辨率的一个背景图像和一个对象。发送给发送设备1的控制信息还供应给组合部分77。因而,当组合部分77接收控制信息时,在步骤S34上组合部分77相应于控制信息中含有的考虑点的坐标认同(recognize)其优先权范围,从对象存储器75中读出发送设备1已经发送的该优先权范围内的高空间分辨率对象,并把该对象写入到子窗口存储器79。In other words, when the determined result at step S32 shows that the additional information contains high-resolution information, it means that the user has operated the control information input section 24 (see FIG. 5 ), the control information has been sent to the sending device 1, and Device 1 has then sent a background image and an object with high resolution for an image in the priority range. The control information sent to the transmitting device 1 is also supplied to the combining section 77 . Thereby, when combining section 77 receives control information, on step S34, combining section 77 corresponds to the coordinate identification (recognize) its priority range of the point of consideration contained in the control information, reads out from object memory 75 that transmission device 1 has transmitted. The high spatial resolution object within the priority range, and write this object to the sub-window memory 79.

此后,流程前进到步骤S35。在步骤S35,组合部分77相应于附加信息中含有的背景图像移动矢量从背景图像存储器73读出显示的当前帧(该帧被称之为考虑帧)的背景图像。此外,组合部分77从对象存储器75读出关于该考虑帧的所显示的一个图像。组合部分77相应于附加信息内含有的对象移动矢量将该考虑帧的背景图像与从对象存储器75读出的对象相组合,并把该考虑帧的组合图像写入到显示存储器78。换言之,组合部分77将一个背景图像写入到(例如)显示存储器78,随后将一个对象覆盖写到显示存储器78上。结果,组合部分77将一个背景图像和一个对象被组合为一个考虑帧图像的一个图像写入到显示存储器78上。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S35. In step S35, the combining section 77 reads out from the background image memory 73 the background image of the current frame (this frame is referred to as a considered frame) displayed corresponding to the background image movement vector contained in the additional information. Furthermore, the combining section 77 reads out an image displayed with respect to the considered frame from the object memory 75 . The combining section 77 combines the background image of the considered frame with the object read from the object memory 75 corresponding to the object movement vector contained in the additional information, and writes the combined image of the considered frame to the display memory 78 . In other words, the combining section 77 writes a background image to, for example, the display memory 78 and then overwrites an object onto the display memory 78 . As a result, the combining section 77 writes, onto the display memory 78, an image in which a background image and an object are combined into a considered frame image.

在这种方式中,写入到显示存储器78考虑帧的图像和写入到子窗口存储器79的一个对象被供应给图像输出部分23(参见图5)。图像输出部分23显示供给的图像和对象。In this manner, an image of the considered frame written to the display memory 78 and an object written to the sub-window memory 79 are supplied to the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5 ). The image output section 23 displays supplied images and objects.

在发送设备1中,所谓的软健可以被包含在例如附加信息中。在这种情况下,组合部分77使用软健将对象和背景图像相组合。In the sending device 1 a so-called soft key can be contained eg in additional information. In this case, the combining section 77 combines the object and the background image using soft keys.

相反,当步骤S32上的确定确定结果表明附加信息不包含高分辨率信息(即,用户未操作控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)),流程前进到步骤S35,跳过步骤33和34。如上所述,组合部分77从背景图像存储器73中读出考虑帧的一个背景图像。此外,组合部分77从对象存储器75中读出一个所需对象,并相应于附加信息将考虑帧的背景图像与从对象存储器75中读出的对象相结合。结果,生成一个考虑帧的图像,并将其写入到显示存储器78。此后,流程返回到步骤S31。然后,组合处理部分22重复相似的处理。In contrast, when the determined result at step S32 indicates that the additional information does not contain high-resolution information (ie, the user has not operated the control information input section 24 (see FIG. 5 )), the flow advances to step S35, skipping steps 33 and 34. As described above, the combining section 77 reads out a background image of the considered frame from the background image memory 73 . Furthermore, the combining section 77 reads out a desired object from the object memory 75, and combines the background image of the considered frame with the object read out from the object memory 75 corresponding to the additional information. As a result, an image considering the frame is generated and written to the display memory 78 . Thereafter, the flow returns to step S31. Then, the combination processing section 22 repeats similar processing.

在上述组合处理中,当用户未操作控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)(即,由诸如没有被拖动(或点击)的鼠标的指点装置组成的控制信息输入部分24)时,如图15(A)所示,低空间分辨率的图像在图像输出部分23(参见图5)上用一个默认时间分辨率显示。在图15(A)中,低空间分辨率的图像在低空间分辨率的背景图像上移动。In the combination processing described above, when the user does not operate the control information input section 24 (see FIG. 5 ) (that is, the control information input section 24 composed of a pointing device such as a mouse that is not dragged (or clicked)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 15(A), the low spatial resolution image is displayed with a default temporal resolution on the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5). In Fig. 15(A), the low spatial resolution image moves over the low spatial resolution background image.

当用户操作控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)时,把光标移动到对象,并把该光标拖动到对象的位置上,像上所述的那样,将控制信息发送给发送设备1。发送设备1以时间分辨率为代价为一个优先权范围内的图像发送显示高空间分辨率图像所需的数据。结果,如图15(B)所示的那样,尽管时间分辨率为(例如)0帧/秒,但在图像输出部分23(参见图5)上显示出围绕拖动位置的优先权范围内的一个对象和一个背景图像的空间分辨率被逐渐改善的图像。换句话说,相应于拖动时间(或点击的数目),在优先权范围内的图像的空间分辨率被逐渐改善。When the user operates the control information input section 24 (see FIG. 5), moves the cursor to the object, and drags the cursor to the position of the object, the control information is transmitted to the transmission device 1 as described above. The transmitting device 1 transmits the data required for displaying images of high spatial resolution for images within a priority range at the expense of temporal resolution. As a result, as shown in FIG. 15(B), although the temporal resolution is (for example) 0 frames/second, the images within the priority range around the dragging position are displayed on the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5 ). An image in which the spatial resolution of an object and a background image is progressively improved. In other words, corresponding to the dragging time (or the number of clicks), the spatial resolution of images within the priority range is gradually improved.

在此情况下,如图15(B)所示,在图像输出部分23(参见图5)上打开一个子窗口。围绕拖动位置的优先权范围内的一个对象按照对象的空间分辨率被逐渐改善的方式来显示。In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(B), a sub-window is opened on the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5). An object within the priority range around the drag position is displayed in such a manner that the spatial resolution of the object is gradually improved.

此后,当用户用控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)停止拖动操作时,如上述的那样,在步骤S35上组合部分77从背景图像存储器73读出考虑帧的一个背景图像,从对象存储器75读出一个对象,相应于附加信息将考虑帧的背景图像与从对象存储器75中读出的对象相组合,并将该组合图像写入到显示存储器78。如上述的那样,由于作为拖动操作结果的高空间分辨的对象被存储在对象存储器75中,图像输出部分23(参见图5)用图15(C)所示的常规时间分辨率显示在考虑帧的相关位置上粘贴作为拖动操作结果的具有高空间分辨率的一个对象的图像。Thereafter, when the user stops the dragging operation with the control information input section 24 (see FIG. 5 ), as described above, the combination section 77 reads out a background image of the considered frame from the background image memory 73 at step S35, and from the object memory 75 reads out an object, combines the background image of the considered frame with the object read from the object memory 75 corresponding to the additional information, and writes the combined image to the display memory 78 . As described above, since the object of high spatial resolution as a result of the drag operation is stored in the object memory 75, the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5) is displayed with the conventional temporal resolution shown in FIG. 15(C) in consideration of Paste an image of an object with high spatial resolution as a result of the drag operation at the relevant position of the frame.

此后,图像输出部分23(参见图5)用常规时间分辨率显示相应于附加信息移动的高空间分辨率的一个对象的图像。Thereafter, the image output section 23 (see FIG. 5) displays an image of an object of high spatial resolution moved corresponding to the additional information with conventional time resolution.

因而,当用户执行在他或她要仔细观看的对象的位置上的拖动操作时,他或她可以观看具有高空间分辨率的对象。换句话说,用户可以详细观看一个对象。Thus, when the user performs a drag operation on the position of the object he or she wants to watch carefully, he or she can watch the object with high spatial resolution. In other words, the user can view an object in detail.

当用户执行拖动操作时,优先权范围内的高空间分辨率的背景图像被存储在背景图像存储器73。因而,即使用户停止拖动操作,也显示背景图像存储器73内存储的高空间分辨率的背景图像。因而,当用户执行拖动操作时,由于围绕拖动位置的优先权范围内的背景图像被改善,因此无论用户何时执行在图像输出部分23(参见图5)的显示屏幕的每个位置上的拖动操作,高空间分辨率的背景图像按一个镶嵌模式逐渐展宽。最后,图像输出部分23显示整个高空间分辨率的背景图像。When the user performs a drag operation, a background image of high spatial resolution within a priority range is stored in the background image memory 73 . Thus, even if the user stops the drag operation, the background image of high spatial resolution stored in the background image memory 73 is displayed. Thus, when the user performs a drag operation, since the background image in the priority range around the drag position is improved, no matter when the user performs With the drag operation, the background image with high spatial resolution is gradually expanded according to a mosaic pattern. Finally, the image output section 23 displays the entire high spatial resolution background image.

此外,根据该实施例,如上所述,由于一个背景图像被存储在背景图像存储器73中,因此发送设备1不需要发送一个已经发送的具有低空间分辨率的一个背景图像。因而,背景图像的传送带宽(传送速率)可以分配给高空间分辨率的一个对象和一个背景图像。Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as described above, since a background image is stored in the background image memory 73, the transmitting device 1 does not need to transmit an already transmitted one with a low spatial resolution. Thus, the transmission bandwidth (transmission rate) of the background image can be allocated to one object and one background image with high spatial resolution.

在上述情况下,作为拖动操作结果的高空间分辨率的对象被存储到对象存储器75。停止拖动操作后,该高空间分辨率的对象被粘贴到背景图像上。因而,由接收设备2所显示的一个对象的空间分辨率变得高了。然而,发送设备1所拍摄的对象的状态不对接收设备2所显示的对象发生影响。In the above case, an object of high spatial resolution as a result of the drag operation is stored to the object memory 75 . After stopping the dragging operation, the high spatial resolution object is pasted onto the background image. Thus, the spatial resolution of an object displayed by the receiving device 2 becomes high. However, the state of the object photographed by the sending device 1 does not affect the object displayed by the receiving device 2 .

为了解决这一问题,在停止拖动操作后,存储在对象存储器75中的高空间分辨率的一个对象可以用解码部分53(参见图12)的存储部分62F中存储的一个对象替代,而忽略对象标志。换句话说,发送设备1发送的对象被连续存储到解码部分53(参见图12)的存储部分62F上。因而,当对象被写入到对象存储器75时,图像输出部分23上显示的一个图像的对象受发送设备1拍摄的对象的状态影响(然而,该对象的空间分辨率降低)。In order to solve this problem, after stopping the dragging operation, an object of high spatial resolution stored in the object memory 75 can be replaced with an object stored in the storage section 62F of the decoding section 53 (see FIG. 12 ), while ignoring Object sign. In other words, the objects transmitted by the transmitting device 1 are successively stored on the storage section 62F of the decoding section 53 (see FIG. 12 ). Thus, when an object is written to the object memory 75, the object of an image displayed on the image output section 23 is affected by the state of the object photographed by the transmitting device 1 (however, the spatial resolution of the object is lowered).

包括发送设备1的发送处理部分16的图7所示的MUX32在控制部分35的控制下将高分辨率信息的有/无、对应于该高分辨率信息的优先权范围内的一个帧速率(时间分辨率)和一个空间分辨率、以及非优先权范围内的一个帧速率和一个空间分辨率放置到多路复用数据的一个首部或类似物上。接收设备2相应于该首部(header)内放置的信息(在下文中将该信息称作首部信息)认同高分辨率信息的有/无、优先权范围内的帧速率和空间分辨率、以及非优先权范围内的帧速率和空间分辨率。The MUX 32 shown in FIG. 7 including the transmission processing section 16 of the transmission device 1 controls the presence/absence of high-resolution information, a frame rate ( time resolution) and a spatial resolution, and a frame rate and a spatial resolution within the non-priority range are placed on a header or the like of the multiplexed data. The receiving device 2 recognizes the presence/absence of high-resolution information, the frame rate and spatial resolution within the priority range, and the non-priority frame rate and spatial resolution within the right range.

在发送设备1中,首部信息可以包含例如接收设备2发送的控制信息中所含有的考虑点的(坐标)。在该情况下,图13所示的组合部分77可以相应于发送设备1所发送的首部信息认同一个考虑点位置上的一个对象。换句话说,在上述情况中,组合部分77相应于控制信息输入部分24(参见图5)供给的控制信息认同控制信息中含有的考虑点位置上的一个对象,从对象存储器75中读出对象,并把该对象供应给子窗口存储器79。然而,当首部信息含有一个考虑点时,组合部分77相应于该首部信息认同该考虑点一个位置上的一个对象。在此情况下,在图5中,控制信息输入部分24不需要把该控制信息供应给接收设备2。In the transmitting device 1 , the header information may contain, for example, (coordinates) of the considered point contained in the control information transmitted by the receiving device 2 . In this case, the combining section 77 shown in FIG. 13 can identify an object at a position of a consideration point corresponding to the header information transmitted by the transmitting device 1 . In other words, in the above case, the combination section 77 reads out the object from the object memory 75 corresponding to the control information supplied from the control information input section 24 (see FIG. , and supply the object to the child window memory 79. However, when the header information contains a consideration point, the combination section 77 identifies an object at a position of the consideration point corresponding to the header information. In this case, in FIG. 5 , the control information input section 24 does not need to supply the control information to the receiving device 2 .

下面,结合图16说明发送设备1经传送路径3向接收设备2发送的一个图像的空间分辨率与时间分辨率之间的关系。Next, the relationship between the spatial resolution and the temporal resolution of an image transmitted from the transmitting device 1 to the receiving device 2 via the transmission path 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 .

假定传送路径3的传送速率为R(bps)以及发送了由一个背景图像和三个对象#1至#3组成的一个图像。为简便起见,在该实施例中不考虑附加信息。此外,假定为了显示具有特定空间分辨率的背景图像和对象#1至#3,它们的每个需要相同的数据量。Assume that the transmission rate of the transmission path 3 is R (bps) and that one image consisting of one background image and three objects #1 to #3 is transmitted. For simplicity, additional information is not considered in this embodiment. Also, assume that in order to display a background image and objects #1 to #3 with a certain spatial resolution, each of them requires the same amount of data.

在此情况下,当用户不执行拖动操作时,在发送设备1中,如图16(A)所示,按传送速率R除以4的R/4[bps]发送背景图像和对象#1至#3。当常规时间分辨率为1/T帧/秒时,发送设备1在至多T秒的时间内可以发送背景图像和对象#1至#3的每个的一帧数据。因而,在此情况下,接收设备2显示用每帧T×R/4比特的数据获得的一个空间分辨率的背景图像和对象#1至#3。In this case, when the user does not perform a drag operation, in the transmission device 1, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the background image and the object #1 are transmitted at R/4 [bps] in which the transmission rate R is divided by 4 to #3. When the conventional temporal resolution is 1/T frame/sec, the transmitting device 1 can transmit the background image and one frame of data of each of the objects #1 to #3 within a period of at most T seconds. Thus, in this case, the reception device 2 displays a background image and objects #1 to #3 of one spatial resolution obtained with data of T×R/4 bits per frame.

当用户执行在例如对象#1的位置上的拖动操作时,如图16(A)所示,发送设备1停止发送背景图像和对象#2和#3,并以传送路径3的整个传送速率R仅发送对象#1。此后,在从时间t1经过时段4T的时间t2上,当用户停止拖动操作时,发送设备1按每个传送速率R/4来发送背景图像和对象#1至#3。When the user performs a drag operation on, for example, the position of object #1, as shown in FIG. R only sends object #1. Thereafter, at time t2 when a period of time 4T elapses from time t1 , when the user stops the drag operation, the transmission device 1 transmits the background image and objects #1 to #3 at each transmission rate R/4.

因而,在用户执行拖动操作的时候,发送设备1为对象#1发送4T×R比特的数据。因此,假定用户执行拖动操作时,时间分辨率为0帧/秒,则接收设备2显示用每帧4T×R比特的数据获得的一个空间分辨率的对象#1。换句话说,为相同量改善水平空间分辨率和垂直空间分辨率时,尽管时间分辨率变为0帧/秒,但接收设备2显示是用户不执行拖动操作的情况的四倍(=(4T×R/(T×R/4比特)))的水平方向和垂直方向的每个中的一个空间分辨率的对象#1。Thus, when the user performs a drag operation, the transmission device 1 transmits data of 4T×R bits for the object #1. Therefore, assuming that when the user performs a drag operation, the temporal resolution is 0 frames/second, and the receiving device 2 displays the object #1 at a spatial resolution obtained with data of 4T×R bits per frame. In other words, when the horizontal spatial resolution and the vertical spatial resolution are improved by the same amount, although the temporal resolution becomes 0 frame/second, the receiving device 2 displays four times as much as the case where the user does not perform the dragging operation (=( Object #1 of one spatial resolution in each of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction of 4T×R/(T×R/4 bits))).

换句话说,该空间分辨率的对象可以以牺牲时间分辨率为代价得到改善。此外,与牺牲时间分辨率的情况相比较,用户考虑的部分的空间分辨率可以快速改善。In other words, objects of this spatial resolution can be improved at the expense of temporal resolution. Furthermore, the spatial resolution of the part considered by the user can be rapidly improved compared to the case where temporal resolution is sacrificed.

在上述情况下,当用户为对象#1执行拖动操作时,不发送背景图像和其它对象#1和#3的所有数据。然而,如图16(B)所示,可以把较高传送速率分配给对象#1的数据,而较低传送速率可以分配给背景图像和其它对象#2和#3的数据。In the above case, when the user performs a drag operation for object #1, the background image and all data of other objects #1 and #3 are not transmitted. However, as shown in FIG. 16(B), a higher transfer rate may be assigned to data of object #1, and a lower transfer rate may be assigned to data of background images and other objects #2 and #3.

另一方面,即使执行了拖动操作,分配给背景图像和对象#1至#3的每个的传送速率也不会从R/4变化。换句话说,在此情况下,由于以时间分辨率为代价改善空间分辨率,(例如)尽管花费长时间显示数据,因此可以改善空间分辨率,而不需要改变传送速率。On the other hand, even if a drag operation is performed, the transfer rate assigned to each of the background image and objects #1 to #3 does not change from R/4. In other words, in this case, since the spatial resolution is improved at the expense of the temporal resolution, the spatial resolution can be improved without changing the transfer rate, for example, although it takes a long time to display the data.

根据该实施例,如上所述,作为拖动操作结果的具有高空间分辨率的一个对象被存储在对象存储器75中。在拖动操作停止后,高空间分辨率的对象被粘贴到一个背景图像上。然而,粘贴高空间分辨率的对象的背景图像的位置取决于发送设备1发送的对象附加信息中含有的一个对象移动矢量。According to this embodiment, as described above, an object with high spatial resolution as a result of the drag operation is stored in the object memory 75 . After the drag operation stops, the high spatial resolution object is pasted onto a background image. However, the position where the background image of the object of high spatial resolution is pasted depends on an object movement vector contained in the object additional information transmitted by the transmitting device 1 .

因而,接收设备2将应当相应于什么样的一个相邻帧的对象来认同什么样的一个特定帧的对象。因此,当发送设备1的对象提取部分14(参见图3)提取一个对象时,对象提取部分14将允许接收设备2将执行这样一个认同操作的信息加到附加信息上。Thus, the receiving device 2 will agree on what object of a particular frame should be recognized corresponding to what object of an adjacent frame. Therefore, when the object extracting section 14 (see FIG. 3) of the transmitting device 1 extracts an object, the object extracting section 14 will allow the receiving device 2 to add information for performing such an identification operation to the additional information.

图17示出了图3所示的对象提取部分14的结构实例。FIG. 17 shows a structural example of the object extraction section 14 shown in FIG. 3 .

图像输入设备11输出的一个图像和背景图像提取部分13输出的一个背景图像被供应给一个减法部分81。减法部分81从图像输入部分输出的图像中减去背景图像提取部分13输出的背景图像,和获得作为一个对象的一个前景图像。减法部分81获得的前景图像被供应给帧存储器82和初始区域划分部分83。An image output from the image input device 11 and a background image output from the background image extraction section 13 are supplied to a subtraction section 81 . The subtraction section 81 subtracts the background image output from the background image extraction section 13 from the image output from the image input section, and obtains a foreground image as an object. The foreground image obtained by the subtraction section 81 is supplied to the frame memory 82 and the initial area division section 83 .

帧存储器82暂时存储减法部分81所供给的前景图像。初始区域划分部分83使用减法部分81供给的处理的当前帧(该帧被称作考虑帧)的前景图像和帧存储器82中存储的前一帧的前景图像(该前景图像被称作在前帧的前景图像)执行初始区域划分处理。The frame memory 82 temporarily stores the foreground image supplied from the subtraction section 81 . The initial area division section 83 uses the foreground image of the current frame (this frame is called a consideration frame) supplied from the subtraction section 81 and the foreground image of the previous frame stored in the frame memory 82 (this foreground image is called a previous frame). foreground image) to perform initial region segmentation processing.

换句话说,初始区域划分部分83相应于象素值按类别归类组成考虑帧的前景图像的每个象素。实际上,当一个象素值由RGB(红、绿、蓝)表示时,初始区域划分部分83根据由R、G、B值的要素组成的一个矢量(该矢量可称之为颜色矢量)与该RGB空间中的多个小区域之间的关系按类别归类每个象素。此外,初始区域划分部分83以相同的方式按类别归类包括帧存储器82中存储的前一帧的前景图像的每个象素。In other words, the initial area dividing section 83 classifies each pixel constituting the foreground image of the considered frame by category corresponding to the pixel value. In fact, when a pixel value is represented by RGB (red, green, blue), the initial area division part 83 is based on a vector (this vector can be called a color vector) composed of elements of R, G, and B values and The relationship between multiple small regions in the RGB space classifies each pixel. Furthermore, the initial area dividing section 83 classifies each pixel including the foreground image of the previous frame stored in the frame memory 82 in the same manner.

当考虑帧是例如第n帧时,初始区域划分部分83把第n帧的前景图像和前一帧的第(n-1)帧的前景图像划分成时间上和空间上相邻的并按相同类别归类的多个象素组成的区域。When the considered frame is, for example, the n-th frame, the initial region dividing section 83 divides the foreground image of the n-th frame and the foreground image of the (n-1)-th frame of the previous frame into temporally and spatially adjacent A region of pixels grouped by category.

换句话说,例如,假定组成第n帧的前景图像的每个象素和组成第(n-1)帧的前景图像的每个象素如图18(A)所示按类别归类。在图18中(还在图19和图20中),一个矩形中包含的一个字符C和一个数字的一个组代表一个象素的类别。In other words, for example, it is assumed that each pixel constituting the foreground image of the nth frame and each pixel constituting the foreground image of the (n-1)th frame are classified by category as shown in FIG. 18(A). In FIG. 18 (also in FIGS. 19 and 20), a group of a character C and a numeral contained in a rectangle represents a category of a pixel.

在图18(A)所示的情况中,当第n帧的前景图像和第(n-1)帧的前景图像被划分成由按相同类别归类的多个象素组成的多个区域时,形成图18(B)所示的虚线所代表的初始区域。In the case shown in FIG. 18(A), when the foreground image of the nth frame and the foreground image of the (n-1)th frame are divided into a plurality of regions composed of a plurality of pixels classified by the same category , forming the initial region represented by the dotted line shown in FIG. 18(B).

初始区域划分部分83所获得的初始区域被供应给图17所示的区域拼接部分84。The initial area obtained by the initial area dividing section 83 is supplied to the area combining section 84 shown in FIG. 17 .

区域拼接部分84执行区域边界处理,对初始区域划分部分83所供给的初始区域进行边界处理。The area concatenation section 84 performs area boundary processing for the initial area supplied from the initial area division section 83 .

换句话说,区域拼接部分84从对象信息存储器88中读出第(n-1)帧中包含的一个对象的对象信息,并认同第(n-1)帧中包含的对象的位置和范围。此外,区域拼接部分84认同组成第(n-1)帧中所含有的对象的象素,并拼接含有象素的初始区域。In other words, the area concatenation section 84 reads object information of an object included in the (n-1)th frame from the object information memory 88, and recognizes the position and range of the object included in the (n-1)th frame. In addition, the region concatenating section 84 identifies the pixels constituting the object contained in the (n-1)th frame, and concatenates the initial region containing the pixels.

实际上,例如,假定在图19(A)所示的实线表示的一个范围(一个方框)内包含一个特定的对象Obj,该对象Obj由被归类为类别c2、c3、c4和c5的诸多象素组成。包含这些象素的初始区域被拼接。因而,在该实例中,由类别c2、c3、c4和c5的象素组成的初始区域(在下文中,类别c#i的象素组成的初始区域被称之为初始区域c#i)被拼接为图19(B)所示的阴影区域。In fact, for example, it is assumed that a specific object Obj classified into categories c2, c3, c4, and c5 is contained within a range (a box) indicated by a solid line shown in FIG. 19(A). composed of many pixels. The initial region containing these pixels is tiled. Thus, in this example, an initial area consisting of pixels of classes c2, c3, c4, and c5 (hereinafter, an initial area consisting of pixels of class c#i is referred to as an initial area c#i) is concatenated is the shaded area shown in Fig. 19(B).

此外,区域拼接部分84计算拼接的初始区域(以下可以称之为拼接区域)与邻近该拼接区域的初始区域之间的距离。在该实例中,一个拼接区域与一个邻近的初始区域(以下可以称之为邻近初始区域)之间的距离可以是包括两个区域(拼接区域和邻近初始区域)的象素的象素值(颜色)的平均值的距离(该距离可以被称之为RGB空间的距离)或两个区域的边界附近中的象素的象素值(颜色)的连续性。Furthermore, the region merging section 84 calculates the distance between the merged initial region (hereinafter may be referred to as a merged region) and the original region adjacent to the merged region. In this instance, the distance between a spliced area and an adjacent initial area (hereinafter may be referred to as an adjacent initial area) may be the pixel value ( color) (this distance may be referred to as a distance in RGB space) or the continuity of pixel values (colors) of pixels in the vicinity of the boundary of two regions.

当拼接区域与邻近初始区域之间的距离小于(或等于)一个预定阈值时,区域拼接部分84拼接拼接区域和邻近初始区域,并生成一个新的拼接区域。区域拼接部分84计算上述的距离,并重复拼接邻近初始区域和拼接区域直至没有可以被拼接成拼接区域的邻近初始区域为止。When the distance between the merged region and the adjacent initial region is less than (or equal to) a predetermined threshold, the region combining part 84 merges the merged region and the adjacent initial region, and generates a new merged region. The region merging section 84 calculates the distance described above, and repeats merging adjacent initial regions and merged regions until there is no adjacent initial region that can be merged into a merged region.

因而,用图19(B)所示的拼接区域形成(例如)图19(C)所示的一个拼接区域。在图19C中,由于初始区域c7与c8之间的距离接近,它们被拼接为图19(B)所示的拼接区域。相反,由于初始区域c1与c6之间的距离远,它们不能被拼接为一个拼接区域。Thus, a stitched region shown in, for example, FIG. 19(C) is formed with the stitched region shown in FIG. 19(B). In FIG. 19C, since the distance between the initial regions c7 and c8 is close, they are merged into the merged region shown in FIG. 19(B). On the contrary, due to the large distance between the initial regions c1 and c6, they cannot be spliced into one spliced region.

当没有邻近初始区域可以被拼接成如图19(C)所示的拼接区域时,区域拼接部分84提取由组成第n帧的前景图像的象素组成的一个部分,作为与第(n-1)帧的对象Obj相对应的一个对象(该对象可以被称之为对应对象),指定与第n帧的对象Obj的标志相同的标志,并把该对象输出给拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86。When there is no adjacent initial region that can be stitched into a stitched region as shown in FIG. ) an object corresponding to the object Obj of the frame (this object can be referred to as a corresponding object), designate the same sign as the sign of the object Obj of the nth frame, and output the object to the splicing area processing part 85 and the separation area Processing section 86 .

换句话说,根据该实施例,各帧中一致的对象被指定相同的标志。接收设备2相应于该标志认同与邻近帧的某对象相当的邻近帧的某对象。In other words, according to this embodiment, objects that coincide in each frame are assigned the same flag. The receiving device 2 recognizes an object of the adjacent frame corresponding to an object of the adjacent frame corresponding to the flag.

分配给第(n-1)帧的对象Obj的标志被包含在对象信息中,并存储在对象信息存储器88中。对于对象信息存储器88,区域拼接部分84认同分配给第(n-1)帧的对象Obj标志。The flag assigned to the object Obj of the (n−1)th frame is included in the object information and stored in the object information memory 88 . With respect to the object information memory 88, the area concatenation section 84 recognizes the object Obj flag assigned to the (n-1)th frame.

此外,当区域拼接部分84以上述方式提取与第(n-1)帧的所有对象相对应的第n帧的对象时,区域拼接部分84提取将第n帧的每个初始区域和其另一个邻近初始区域拼接为一个对象的一个区域,并把一个新标志(而不是指定给(n-1)帧的对象的任何标志)分配给被提取的对象和把被提取的对象输出给拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86。Furthermore, when the region concatenation section 84 extracts the objects of the nth frame corresponding to all the objects of the (n-1)th frame in the above-described manner, the region concatenation section 84 extracts each initial region of the nth frame and its other A region adjacent to the initial region is stitched into an object, and a new flag (rather than any flag assigned to the object at (n-1) frames) is assigned to the extracted object and the extracted object is output to the stitched region process section 85 and separate area processing section 86.

拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86分别执行一个拼接区域处理和一个分离区域处理。当拼接对象时执行拼接区域处理。当分离拼接对象时执行分离区域处理。The joined-area processing section 85 and the separated-area processing section 86 execute a joined-area process and a separated-area process, respectively. The stitched region processing is performed when stitching objects. Separation region processing is performed when separating stitched objects.

换句话说,例如,就第(n-1)帧、第n帧和第(n+1)帧这三个连续帧而言,如图20所示,在第(n-1)帧中,对象A和B相互接近。在第n帧中,对象A和B相互重叠。换句话说,在第n帧中,对象A和B可以被拼接为一个对象。在此情况下,已被拼接为一个对象的对象A和B按它们的方向连续移动。在第(n+1)帧中,拼接对象被分离成两个对象A和B。In other words, for example, regarding three consecutive frames of the (n-1)th frame, the nth frame, and the (n+1)th frame, as shown in FIG. 20, in the (n-1)th frame, Objects A and B are close to each other. In frame n, objects A and B overlap each other. In other words, in the nth frame, objects A and B can be spliced into one object. In this case, the objects A and B that have been spliced into one object move continuously in their directions. In the (n+1)th frame, the stitched object is separated into two objects A and B.

在此情况下,在在区域拼接部分84的区域拼接处理中,第n帧的被拼接对象相当于地(n-1)帧中的对象A和B二者。相反,第(n+1)帧中被分离的对象A和B相当于第N帧中的一个拼接对象。根据该实施例,假定特定帧的一个对象相当于前一帧的一个对象。因而,如上所述,最好不用一个对象相关两个对象。相反,最好不用两个对象相关一个对象。In this case, in the region-merging processing in the region-merging section 84, the merged object of the n-th frame corresponds to both the objects A and B in the (n-1) frame. On the contrary, the separated objects A and B in the (n+1)th frame are equivalent to one concatenated object in the Nth frame. According to this embodiment, it is assumed that an object of a certain frame is equivalent to an object of the previous frame. Thus, as mentioned above, it is best not to have one object relate to two objects. Instead, it's better not to have two objects related to one object.

因而,通过用第(n-1)帧的对象A和B的一个计算相关第n帧的一个被拼接对象,拼接处理部分85执行一个拼接区域处理。通过用第n帧的一个被拼接对象相关第(n+1)帧的两个对象A和B之一,分离区域处理部分86执行分离区域处理。Thus, the mosaic processing section 85 executes a mosaic area process by calculating a mosaic object of the n-th frame with respect to one of the objects A and B of the (n-1)-th frame. The separated region processing section 86 performs separated region processing by correlating one of the two objects A and B of the (n+1)th frame with one spliced object of the nth frame.

换句话说,拼接区域处理部分85把与第(n-1)帧的对象A和B之一相同的标志分配给第n帧的一个拼接对象。另一方面,分离区域处理部分86把与第n帧的拼接对象相同的标志分配给第(n+1)帧的两个被分离对象A和B之一,并把一个新标志分配给第(n1)帧的另一个被分离的对象。In other words, the merged area processing section 85 assigns the same flag as one of the objects A and B of the (n-1)th frame to one merged object of the nth frame. On the other hand, the separated area processing section 86 assigns the same flag as the joined object of the nth frame to one of the two separated objects A and B of the (n+1)th frame, and assigns a new flag to the ( n1) Another detached object of frame.

作为由拼接区域处理部分85执行的拼接区域处理的结果的对象提取结果和作为由分离区域处理部分86执行的分离区域处理的结果的对象提取结果由区域拼接部分84进行拼接,并供应给一个新区域处理部分87。The object extraction result as a result of the combined area processing performed by the combined area processing section 85 and the object extraction result as a result of the separated area processing performed by the separated area processing section 86 are combined by the area combining section 84 and supplied to a new Area processing section 87 .

当拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86的对象提取结果含有一个新对象时,新区域处理部分87执行新对象的新区域处理。When the object extraction results of the joined area processing section 85 and the separated area processing section 86 contain a new object, the new area processing section 87 performs new area processing of the new object.

有三种类型的对象,它们在拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86的对象提取结果中被分配新标志。第一类型的对象是这样一种对象:由于对象移动快并且该对象不在考虑帧和前一帧内空间重叠,因此区域拼接部分84不提取像前一帧的对应对象那样的考虑帧的对象。第二类型的对象是这样一种对象:由于前一帧的对应对象与另一对象拼接,因此分离区域处理部分86不可能用前一帧的对应帧相关考虑帧的对象。第三类型的对象是这样一种对象:由于在考虑帧中出现一个新对象,因此分配一个新标志给该新对象。There are three types of objects to which new flags are assigned in the object extraction results of the merged area processing section 85 and the separated area processing section 86 . A first type of object is one that the region stitching section 84 does not extract the object of the frame of interest like the corresponding object of the previous frame because the object moves fast and the object does not spatially overlap in the frame of interest and the previous frame. The second type of object is an object for which it is impossible for the separation region processing section 86 to correlate the object of the considered frame with the corresponding frame of the previous frame because the corresponding object of the previous frame is spliced with another object. A third type of object is an object to which a new flag is assigned due to the appearance of a new object in the frame under consideration.

在这三种类型的对象中,一个新标志应当被分配给第三类型的一个对象。因而,对于第一和第二类型的对象,新区域处理部分87从前一帧中检测一个对应对象,并将和考虑帧对象相同的标志再分配给前一帧的对应对象。Among these three types of objects, a new flag should be assigned to an object of the third type. Thus, for objects of the first and second types, the new area processing section 87 detects a corresponding object from the previous frame, and reassigns the same flag as the object of the considered frame to the corresponding object of the previous frame.

事实上,新区域处理部分87核对对象信息存储器88,认同考虑帧的几个过去帧的对象,和获得被认同对象的每个与考虑帧的考虑对象之间的距离,该考虑对象被分配一个新标志。像对象之间的距离那样,也可以使用对象的特征量之间的距离。对象特征量的实例是对象的一个区域、一个由对象的每个象素组成的轮廓线的切线方向的条形图(例如,沿上、下、左、右、左上、左下、右上和右上八个方向的每个方向的条形图)、和对象的一个移动矢量。In fact, the new area processing section 87 checks the object information memory 88, recognizes the objects of several past frames of the considered frame, and obtains the distance between each of the recognized objects and the considered object of the considered frame, which is assigned a new logo. Like the distance between objects, the distance between feature quantities of objects may also be used. Examples of object feature quantities are an area of the object, a bar graph in the tangential direction of the contour line made up of each pixel of the object (for example, along the upper, lower, left, right, upper left, lower left, upper right, and upper right eighth) bars in each of the directions), and a movement vector for the object.

新区域处理部分87获得被认同对象与考虑对象之间的距离的最小值。当最小值小于(或等于)预定阈值时,新区域处理部分87把具有距考虑对象最小距离的一个对象处理为与考虑对象相对应的一个对象,把与获得的对象的标志相同的标志分配给考虑对象,和输出该考虑对象。当认同对象与考虑对象之间的距离的最小值不小于预定阈值(即,没有这样的对象,其相距考虑对象的距离在过去帧中是短的)时,新区域处理部分87把该考虑对象处理为考虑帧中新近出现的一个对象,把一个新标志分配给该考虑帧,和输出该考虑帧。The new area processing section 87 obtains the minimum value of the distance between the recognized object and the considered object. When the minimum value is less than (or equal to) the predetermined threshold, the new area processing section 87 processes an object having the minimum distance from the considered object as an object corresponding to the considered object, and assigns the same flag as the obtained object flag to Consider an object, and output the considered object. When the minimum value of the distance between the agreed object and the considered object is not less than a predetermined threshold (that is, there is no such object whose distance from the considered object was short in the past frame), the new area processing section 87 converts the considered object to The process is to assign a new flag to the consideration frame for an object newly appearing in the consideration frame, and output the consideration frame.

新区域处理部分87的输出被供应给附加信息计算部分15(参见图3)和发送处理部分16(参见图3)。此外,新区域处理部分87的输出被供应给对象信息存储器88。对象信息存储器88暂时存储一个对象(该对象的位置和尺寸(轮廓)、组成该对象的象素的象素值等)和作为对象信息分配的一个标志。The output of the new area processing section 87 is supplied to the additional information calculation section 15 (see FIG. 3 ) and the transmission processing section 16 (see FIG. 3 ). Furthermore, the output of the new area processing section 87 is supplied to the object information storage 88 . The object information memory 88 temporarily stores an object (position and size (outline) of the object, pixel values of pixels constituting the object, etc.) and a flag assigned as object information.

下面结合图21所示的流程图说明从一个图像提取一个对象的对象提取处理。对象提取处理由图17所示的对象提取部分14执行。Object extraction processing for extracting an object from an image will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 21 . The object extraction processing is performed by the object extraction section 14 shown in FIG. 17 .

图像输出部分11输出的一个图像和背景图像提取部分13输出的一个背景图像被供应给减法部分81。在步骤S41,减法部分81从图像输入部分11输出的图像中减去背景图像提取部分13输出的背景图像,获得作为一个对象的一个前景图像。减法部分81获得的前景图像被供应给帧存储器82和初始区域划分部分83。帧存储器82存储从减法部分81输出的前景图像。One image output from the image output section 11 and one background image output from the background image extraction section 13 are supplied to the subtraction section 81 . In step S41, the subtraction section 81 subtracts the background image output from the background image extraction section 13 from the image output from the image input section 11 to obtain a foreground image as an object. The foreground image obtained by the subtraction section 81 is supplied to the frame memory 82 and the initial area division section 83 . The frame memory 82 stores the foreground image output from the subtraction section 81 .

另一方面,在步骤S42,初始区域划分部分83核对考虑帧的前一帧的一个前景图像,执行根据图18所述的初始区域划分处理,获得初始区域,并把获得的初始区域供应给区域拼接部分84。在步骤S43,区域拼接部分84核对对象信息存储器88中存储的前一帧的对象信息,按照结合图19所述的方式为初始区域划分部分83输出的初始区域执行区域拼接处理,并提取考虑帧的一个对象。On the other hand, in step S42, the initial area dividing section 83 checks a foreground image of a frame preceding the considered frame, performs the initial area dividing process described in accordance with FIG. 18, obtains an initial area, and supplies the obtained initial area to the area Splicing part 84. In step S43, the region mosaic section 84 checks the object information of the previous frame stored in the object information memory 88, performs region mosaic processing for the initial region output by the initial region dividing section 83 in the manner described in conjunction with FIG. 19 , and extracts the considered frame an object of .

区域拼接部分84所提取的对象被供应给拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86。在步骤S44,拼接区域处理部分85或分离区域处理部分86按照结合图20所述的方式执行拼接区域处理或分离区域处理,把处理的结果输出给新区域处理部分87。The objects extracted by the area concatenation section 84 are supplied to the concatenation area processing section 85 and the separation area processing section 86 . In step S44, the joined area processing section 85 or the separated area processing section 86 executes joined area processing or separated area processing in the manner described in conjunction with FIG.

在步骤S45,新区域处理部分87为拼接区域处理部分85和分离区域处理部分86的输出执行上述的新区域处理。因而,新区域处理部分87输出考虑帧的最终对象提取结果。对象的提取结果被供应给附加信息计算部分15(参见图3)和发送处理部分16(参见图3)。此外,对象的提取结果被供应给对象信息存储器88并存储在其中。In step S45 , the new area processing section 87 performs the above-described new area processing for the outputs of the merged area processing section 85 and the separated area processing section 86 . Thus, the new area processing section 87 outputs the final object extraction result of the considered frame. The extraction result of the object is supplied to the additional information calculation section 15 (see FIG. 3 ) and the transmission processing section 16 (see FIG. 3 ). Furthermore, the extraction result of the object is supplied to and stored in the object information storage 88 .

此后,流程返回到步骤S20,在此步骤上,下一帧被指定为一个新考虑帧。然后对象提取部分14重复相似的处理。Thereafter, the flow returns to step S20, at which the next frame is designated as a new frame for consideration. The object extraction section 14 then repeats similar processing.

下面结合图22所示的流程图详细说明在图21的步骤S43上由区域拼接部分84执行的区域拼接处理。The area combining process performed by the area combining section 84 at step S43 in FIG. 21 will be described in detail below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 22 .

在区域拼接处理中,首先,在步骤S51上,区域拼接部分84核对关于在考虑帧的前一帧(在前帧)中含有的一个对象的对象信息,把在前帧的对象处理为一个考虑对象。在步骤S51上,使用考虑对象,如图19(B)所示,区域拼接部分84拼接初始区域划分部分83输出的初始区域,形成一个拼接区域。In the area mosaic processing, first, at step S51, the area mosaic section 84 checks the object information about an object contained in the previous frame (previous frame) of the considered frame, and processes the object of the previous frame as a considered object. In step S51, using the object of consideration, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the region concatenating part 84 concatenates the initial regions output by the initial region dividing part 83 to form a concatenated region.

此后,流程前进到步骤S52。在步骤S52,区域拼接部分84搜索邻近拼接区域的一个初始区域(该初始区域可以称之为邻近初始区域)。此后,流程前进到步骤S53。在步骤S53,区域拼接部分84计算拼接区域与考虑的初始区域之间的距离。此后,流程前进到步骤S54。在步骤S54,区域拼接部分84确定区域间的距离是否小于一个预定的阈值。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S52. In step S52, the area combining section 84 searches for an initial area adjacent to the merged area (this initial area may be referred to as an adjacent initial area). Thereafter, the flow advances to step S53. In step S53, the area merging section 84 calculates the distance between the merging area and the considered initial area. Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S54. In step S54, the region combining section 84 determines whether the distance between regions is smaller than a predetermined threshold.

当步骤S54上的确定结果表明拼接区域与考虑的初始区域之间的距离小于预定的阈值时,流程前进到步骤S55。在步骤S55,区域拼接部分84把考虑的初始区域拼接到拼接区域,从而形成一个新的拼接区域。此后,流程前进到步骤S56。When the determined result at step S54 indicates that the distance between the stitched area and the considered initial area is smaller than the predetermined threshold, the flow advances to step S55. In step S55, the region merging section 84 merges the considered initial region into the merged region, thereby forming a new merged region. Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S56.

相反,当步骤S54上的确定结果表明拼接区域与考虑的初始区域之间的距离不小于预定的阈值时,流程前进到步骤S56,跳过步骤S55。换句话说,区域拼接部分84不把考虑的初始区域拼接到拼接区域。在步骤S56,区域拼接部分84确定邻近拼接区域的所有初始区域是否已经都被搜索。当步骤S56上的确定结果表明邻近拼接区域的所有初始区域还未被搜索时,流程返回到步骤S52。在步骤S52,区域拼接部分84搜索未被搜索到的邻近初始区域。此后,区域拼接部分84重复相似的处理。On the contrary, when the determined result at step S54 indicates that the distance between the concatenated area and the considered initial area is not smaller than the predetermined threshold, the flow proceeds to step S56, skipping step S55. In other words, the region merging section 84 does not merge the considered initial region into the merged region. In step S56, the area mosaic section 84 determines whether or not all initial areas adjacent to the merged area have been searched. When the determined result at step S56 indicates that all initial areas adjacent to the stitched area have not been searched, the flow returns to step S52. In step S52, the area concatenation section 84 searches for adjacent initial areas that have not been searched. Thereafter, the region mosaic section 84 repeats similar processing.

当步骤S56上的确定结果表明邻近拼接区域的所有初始区域已经被搜索时,流程前进到步骤S57。在步骤S57,区域拼接部分84确定在前帧中含有的所有对象的每个是否已经被指定为考虑对象。当步骤S57上的确定结果表明在前帧中含有的所有对象的每个都未被指定为考虑对象时,流程返回到步骤S51。在步骤S51,区域拼接部分84把在前帧中含有的一个对象指定为考虑对象,然后为新近考虑的对象重复相似的处理。When the determined result at step S56 indicates that all initial areas adjacent to the stitched area have been searched, the flow proceeds to step S57. In step S57, the region mosaic section 84 determines whether or not each of all objects contained in the previous frame has been designated as an object of consideration. When the determined result at step S57 signifies that each of all the objects contained in the previous frame is not specified as the object of consideration, the flow returns to step S51. In step S51, the region concatenation section 84 designates an object contained in the previous frame as the object of consideration, and then repeats similar processing for the newly considered object.

相反,当步骤S57上的确定结果表明在前帧中含有的所有对象的每个已经被指定为考虑对象时,流程返回到被调用进程。In contrast, when the determined result at step S57 signifies that each of all objects contained in the previous frame has been designated as an object of consideration, the flow returns to the called process.

下面,结合图23所示的流程图详细说明在图21所示的步骤S44上由拼接区域处理部分85执行的拼接区域处理。Next, the merged region processing performed by the merged region processing section 85 at step S44 shown in FIG. 21 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 23 .

首先,在步骤S61上,拼接区域处理部分85把处理的一个帧指定为一个考虑帧,核对对象信息存储器88,在在前帧的对象在空间上与考虑帧的考虑对象重叠的条件下认同前一帧(在前帧)中含有的对象数目(即,考虑帧的在前帧的对象数目),并把对象的数目调整到一个变量N。First, at step S61, the concatenated area processing section 85 designates a processed frame as a considered frame, checks the object information memory 88, and recognizes the previous frame under the condition that the object of the previous frame spatially overlaps with the considered object of the considered frame. The number of objects contained in a frame (the previous frame) (ie, the number of objects in the previous frame of the considered frame), and adjust the number of objects to a variable N.

此后流程前进到步骤S62。在步骤S62,拼接区域处理部分85确定变量N是否为2或是否大于2。当变量N小于2(即,在前帧中不含有空间上与考虑对象重叠的对象或对象的数目为1)时,流程前进到步骤S65,跳过步骤S63和S64。Thereafter the flow advances to step S62. In step S62, the merged area processing section 85 determines whether the variable N is 2 or greater than 2. When the variable N is less than 2 (ie, there is no object in the previous frame that spatially overlaps with the considered object or the number of objects is 1), the process proceeds to step S65, and steps S63 and S64 are skipped.

相反,当步骤S62上的确定结果表明变量N等于2或大于2(即,在前帧中含有空间上与考虑对象重叠的两个或多个对象)时,流程前进到步骤S63。在步骤S63,拼接区域处理部分85计算考虑对象与在空间上和考虑对象重叠的在前帧的两个或多个对象的每个之间的距离。此后流程前进到步骤S64。In contrast, when the determined result at step S62 indicates that the variable N is equal to or greater than 2 (ie, two or more objects spatially overlapping with the considered object are contained in the previous frame), the flow proceeds to step S63. In step S63 , the stitched area processing section 85 calculates the distance between the object under consideration and each of two or more objects of the previous frame that spatially overlap the object under consideration. Thereafter the flow advances to step S64.

在步骤S64,拼接区域处理部分85从步骤S63上获得的对象中选择具有到考虑帧最小距离的一个对象,并把和所选择对象的标志相同的标志分配给考虑对象。At step S64, the merged area processing section 85 selects an object having the smallest distance to the considered frame from among the objects obtained at step S63, and assigns the same flag as that of the selected object to the considered object.

此后,流程前进到标志S65。在步骤S65,拼接区域处理部分85确定考虑帧中含有的所有对象的每个是否已经被指定为考虑对象。当步骤S65上的确定结果表明考虑帧中含有的所有对象的每个还未被指定为考虑对象时,拼接区域处理部分85把这些对象中的一个指定为考虑帧。此后,流程返回到步骤S61。在步骤S61,拼接区域处理部分85重复相似的处理。Thereafter, the flow advances to flag S65. In step S65 , the merged area processing section 85 determines whether or not each of all the objects contained in the considered frame has been designated as the considered object. When the determined result at step S65 indicates that each of all the objects contained in the considered frame has not been designated as the considered object, the merged area processing section 85 designates one of these objects as the considered frame. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S61. In step S61, the merged area processing section 85 repeats similar processing.

另一方面,当步骤S65上的确定结果表明考虑帧中含有的所有对象的每个已经被指定为考虑对象时,流程返回到被调用进程。On the other hand, when the determined result at step S65 signifies that each of all objects contained in the consideration frame has been designated as an object of consideration, the flow returns to the called process.

下面,结合图24所示的流程图详细说明图21所示的在步骤S44上由分离区域处理部分86执行的分离区域处理。Next, the separation region processing performed by the separation region processing section 86 at step S44 shown in FIG. 21 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 24 .

分离区域处理部分86核对对象信息存储器88并把考虑帧的前一帧(在前帧)中含有的对象之一指定为一个考虑对象。此外,在步骤S71,分离区域处理部分86认同与对应于考虑对象的考虑帧的对象数目(认同的对象被称之为对应对象),并把对象的数目调整到变量N。The separated area processing section 86 checks the object information memory 88 and designates one of the objects contained in the previous frame (previous frame) of the considered frame as a considered object. Further, in step S71, the separated area processing section 86 agrees the number of objects of the frame under consideration corresponding to the object under consideration (the agreed object is referred to as a corresponding object), and adjusts the number of objects to a variable N.

此后,流程前进到步骤S72。在步骤S72,分离区域处理部分86确定变量N是否等于2或大于2。Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S72. In step S72, the separation area processing section 86 determines whether the variable N is equal to 2 or greater than 2.

当步骤S72上的确定结果表明变量N不大于2(即,考虑帧中不含有在空间上与考虑对象重叠的对象或对象的数目为1)时,流程前进到步骤S76,跳过步骤S73至S75。When the determination result on the step S72 shows that the variable N is not greater than 2 (that is, the considered frame does not contain an object that overlaps with the considered object in space or the number of objects is 1), the flow process advances to the step S76, skipping the steps S73 to S75.

相反,当步骤S72上的确定结果表明变量N等于2或大于2(即,考虑帧中含有空间上与考虑对象重叠的两个或多个对象(对应于考虑对象的对象))时,流程前进到步骤S73。在步骤S73,分离区域处理部分86计算这些对象的每个与考虑对象之间的距离。此后,流程前进到步骤S74。On the contrary, when the determined result at step S72 shows that the variable N is equal to 2 or greater than 2 (that is, when the consideration frame contains two or more objects (objects corresponding to the consideration objects) that overlap with the consideration object in space), the flow proceeds Go to step S73. In step S73, the separation area processing section 86 calculates the distance between each of these objects and the object of consideration. Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S74.

在步骤S74,分离区域处理部分86从这些对象中选择相距考虑对象具有最小距离的一个对象,和把与被选择对象的标志相同的标志分配给考虑对象。In step S74, the separation area processing section 86 selects an object having the smallest distance from the object under consideration from among the objects, and assigns the same flag as that of the selected object to the object under consideration.

此后,流程前进到步骤S75。在步骤S75,分离区域处理部分86把一个新标志分配给在步骤S74上未被选择的对象之一(即,除相距考虑对象最短距离的对象以外的对象)。此后,流程前进到步骤S76。Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S75. At step S75, the separated area processing section 86 assigns a new flag to one of the objects not selected at step S74 (ie, objects other than the object at the shortest distance from the considered object). Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S76.

在步骤S76,分离区域处理部分86确定在前帧中含有的所有对象的每一个是否已经被指定为考虑对象。当步骤S76上的确定结果表明在前一帧中含有的所有对象的每一个还未被指定为考虑对象时,分离区域处理部分86指定这些对象之一为考虑对象。此后,流程返回到步骤S71。在步骤S71,分离区域处理部分86重复相似的处理。In step S76, the separated area processing section 86 determines whether or not each of all objects contained in the previous frame has been designated as an object of consideration. When the determined result at step S76 indicates that each of all the objects contained in the previous frame has not been designated as the object of consideration, the separated area processing section 86 designates one of these objects as the object of consideration. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S71. In step S71, the separated area processing section 86 repeats similar processing.

当步骤S76上的确定结果表明在前帧中含有的所有对象的每一个已经被指定为考虑对象时,流程返回到被调用进程。When the determined result at step S76 signifies that each of all objects contained in the previous frame has been designated as an object of consideration, the flow returns to the called process.

在上述情况下,当用户用控制信息输入部分24指定一个考虑点时,发送设备1控制数据的传送,以便以图像的时间分辨率为代价来改善含有考虑点的优先权范围内的一个图像的空间分辨率。另一方面,发送设备1可以学习用户的偏爱,相应于学习结果来检测用户打算用一个高空间分辨率观看的一个对象或类似物,并控制数据的传送以便用一个高空间分辨率显示该对象。In the above case, when the user designates a point of consideration with the control information input section 24, the transmission device 1 controls the transmission of data so as to improve the quality of an image within the priority range containing the point of consideration at the expense of the temporal resolution of the image. spatial resolution. On the other hand, the transmitting device 1 can learn the user's preference, detect an object or the like that the user intends to view with a high spatial resolution corresponding to the learning result, and control transmission of data so as to display the object with a high spatial resolution .

图25示出了在发送设备1执行这样一种控制的情况下图7所示的控制部分35的结构实例。FIG. 25 shows an example of the structure of the control section 35 shown in FIG. 7 in the case where the transmitting device 1 executes such a control.

优先权范围指定部分91接收从接收设备2发送的一个控制信号,按上述方式指定优先权范围,并把指定的优先权范围供应给选择控制部分92和特征量提取部分93。The priority range specifying section 91 receives a control signal transmitted from the receiving device 2, specifies the priority range in the above-mentioned manner, and supplies the specified priority range to the selection control section 92 and the feature quantity extraction section 93.

选择控制部分92控制MUX32(参见图7)的背景图像、对象和附加信息的数据选择。换句话说,当选择控制部分92从优先权范围指定部分91接收到优先权范围时,选择控制部分92控制MUX32(参见图7)以图像的时间分辨率为代价改善该优先权范围内图像的空间分辨率。此外,当选择控制部分92接收到来自对象检测部分95的一个标志时,选择控制部分92控制MUX32(参见图7)以图像的时间分辨率为代价改善具有该标志的对象的空间分辨率。The selection control section 92 controls data selection of background images, objects and additional information of the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7). In other words, when the selection control section 92 receives the priority range from the priority range designation section 91, the selection control section 92 controls the MUX 32 (see FIG. spatial resolution. Furthermore, when the selection control section 92 receives a flag from the object detection section 95, the selection control section 92 controls the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7) to improve the spatial resolution of the object with the flag at the expense of the temporal resolution of the image.

数据量计算部分34(参见图7)向选择控制部分92供应MUX32输出的多路复用数据的数据速率。选择控制部分92控制MUX32的数据选择,使多路复用的数据速率不超过传送路径3的传送速率。The data amount calculation section 34 (see FIG. 7 ) supplies the selection control section 92 with the data rate of the multiplexed data output by the MUX 32 . The selection control section 92 controls the data selection of the MUX 32 so that the multiplexed data rate does not exceed the transfer rate of the transfer path 3 .

预处理部分12(参见图3)输出的背景图像、对象和附加信息,以及优先权范围指定部分91输出的优先权范围,被供应给特征量提取部分93。特征量提取部分93提取从优先权范围指定部分91输出的优先权范围内的图像的特征量。换句话说,特征量提取部分93提取优先权范围内含有的对象的特征量,使该特征量反映用户正在考虑的图像的趋势。The background image, object, and additional information output by the preprocessing section 12 (see FIG. 3 ), and the priority range output by the priority range specifying section 91 are supplied to the feature quantity extraction section 93 . The feature quantity extracting section 93 extracts feature quantities of images within the priority range output from the priority range specifying section 91 . In other words, the feature amount extraction section 93 extracts the feature amount of the objects contained in the priority range such that the feature amount reflects the trend of the image the user is considering.

实际上,例如如图26所示,特征量提取部分93提取的特定人的一个对象的特征量表示:一个对象是一个人,对象的移动是一致的,对象的景深方向的位置(景深)是前景,显示的对象的位置是中央,对象正在移动(对象是正在移动的一个位置),对象的区域包含眼睛、鼻子和嘴巴(对象的区域由眼睛、鼻子和嘴巴组成),对象的图案是条纹图案(对象是一个条纹部分),对象的颜色是红色的(对象是一个红色部分)。Actually, for example, as shown in FIG. 26 , the feature quantity of an object of a specific person extracted by the feature quantity extracting section 93 indicates that an object is a person, the movement of the object is consistent, and the position of the object in the depth direction (depth of field) is Foreground, the position of the displayed object is the center, the object is moving (the object is a position that is moving), the area of the object contains eyes, nose and mouth (the area of the object consists of eyes, nose and mouth), the pattern of the object is stripes The pattern (the object is a striped part), the color of the object is red (the object is a red part).

特征量提取部分93获得一个提取对象的矢量(具有特征量的元素)(该矢量可以被称之为特征量矢量),并将条形图存储部分94中存储的获得特征量矢量的条形图的频率递增1。The feature quantity extraction part 93 obtains a vector (element with a feature quantity) of an extraction object (this vector can be referred to as a feature quantity vector), and obtains the bar graph of the feature quantity vector stored in the bar graph storage part 94 The frequency is incremented by 1.

条形图存储部分94把特征量矢量的条形图作为用户偏爱的学习结果进行存储。The bar graph storage section 94 stores a bar graph of the feature quantity vector as a user's preferred learning result.

对象检测部分95从预处理部分12(参见图3)供应的那些对象中检测一个对象,以便从条形图存储部分94中获得具有条形图最高频率的特征量矢量。换句话说,对象检测部分95按照与特征量提取部分93相同的方式获得一个特征矢量,用于预处理部分12(参见图3)供给的一个对象。此外,对象检测部分95核对条形图存储部分94中存储的条形图,确定预处理部分12(参见图3)供给的对象的特征量矢量是否被包含在具有最高频率的特征量矢量的特征量矢量空间的一个预定范围内。当特征量矢量被包含在预定范围内时,对象检测部分95把该对象指定为用户打算考虑的对象,并把该对象的标志供应给选择控制部分92。The object detection section 95 detects an object from those supplied from the preprocessing section 12 (see FIG. 3 ) to obtain a feature quantity vector having the highest frequency of the histogram from the histogram storage section 94 . In other words, the object detection section 95 obtains a feature vector for an object supplied from the preprocessing section 12 (see FIG. 3 ) in the same manner as the feature amount extraction section 93 . Furthermore, the object detection section 95 checks the histogram stored in the histogram storage section 94 to determine whether the feature amount vector of the object supplied from the preprocessing section 12 (see FIG. 3 ) is contained in the feature amount vector of the feature amount vector having the highest frequency. within a predetermined range of vector space. When the feature quantity vector is contained within a predetermined range, the object detection section 95 specifies the object as the object that the user intends to consider, and supplies the flag of the object to the selection control section 92 .

下面,结合图27所示的流程图说明MUX32(参见图7)的控制处理。该控制处理由图25所示的控制部分35执行。Next, the control processing of the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7 ) will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 27 . This control processing is executed by the control section 35 shown in FIG. 25 .

首先,在步骤S81,优先权范围指定部分91确定控制信号是否已经从接收设备2发送。当步骤S81上的确定结果表明控制信号已经从接收设备2发送时,流程前进到步骤S82。在步骤S82上,优先权范围指定部分91相应于该控制信号按上述方式指定一个优先权范围,并把该优先权范围供应给选择控制部分92和特征量提取部分93。First, at step S81 , the priority range specifying section 91 determines whether or not a control signal has been transmitted from the receiving device 2 . When the determined result at step S81 indicates that the control signal has been transmitted from the receiving device 2, the flow proceeds to step S82. At step S82, the priority range specifying section 91 specifies a priority range corresponding to the control signal in the above-described manner, and supplies the priority range to the selection control section 92 and the feature quantity extraction section 93.

在步骤S83,选择控制部分92控制MUX32(参见图7)以图像的时间分辨率为代价改善优先权范围指定部分91所供给的优先权范围内一个图像的(一个对象和一个背景图像)的空间分辨率。In step S83, the selection control section 92 controls the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7) to improve the space of an image (an object and a background image) within the priority range supplied from the priority range specifying section 91 at the expense of the temporal resolution of the image. resolution.

在步骤S84上,特征量提取部分93提取优先权范围指定部分91所供给的优先权范围内的图像的特征量,获得具有由对象的每一特征量所组成的元素的一个特征量矢量。在步骤S85上,特征量提取部分93将条形图存储部分94中存储的特征量矢量的条形图的频率递增1。流程返回到步骤S81。At step S84, the feature amount extracting section 93 extracts feature amounts of images within the priority range supplied from the priority range specifying section 91, obtaining a feature amount vector having elements composed of each feature amount of the object. At step S85 , the feature amount extraction section 93 increments the frequency of the histogram of the feature amount vector stored in the histogram storage section 94 by one. The flow returns to step S81.

在步骤S81到步骤S85的循环中,条形图存储部分94形成用户打算考虑的对象特征矢量的一个条形图。换句话说,条形图存储部分94学习用户的偏爱。In the loop from step S81 to step S85, the histogram storage section 94 forms a histogram of the object feature vectors that the user intends to consider. In other words, the bar graph storage section 94 learns the user's preference.

此外,特征量提取部分93可以量化所获得的特征量矢量,并递增与特征量矢量的量化结果相对应的代码的频率。在这种情况下,条形图存储部分94暂时存储代码的条形图。Furthermore, the feature amount extraction section 93 may quantize the obtained feature amount vector and increment the frequency of the code corresponding to the quantization result of the feature amount vector. In this case, the bar graph storage section 94 temporarily stores the bar graph of the code.

相反,当步骤S81上的确定结果表明接收设备2还未发送控制信号时,流程前进到步骤S86。在步骤S86上,对象检测部分95按照与特征量提取部分93相同方式获得预处理部分12(参见图3)所提供的对象的特征量矢量。此外,在步骤S87上,对象检测部分95核对条形图存储部分94中所存储的条形图,并确定在有最高频率的特征量矢量周围的特征量矢量空间的一个预定范围内是否包含预处理部分12(参见图3)所提供的对象的一个特征量矢量。换句话说,在步骤S87,对象检测部分95确定具有最高频率的特征量矢量与预处理部分12所供给的对象的特征量矢量之间的距离是否等于或小于一个预定值。In contrast, when the determined result at step S81 indicates that the receiving device 2 has not transmitted the control signal, the flow proceeds to step S86. At step S86, the object detection section 95 obtains the feature amount vector of the object supplied from the preprocessing section 12 (see FIG. 3 ) in the same manner as the feature amount extraction section 93 . Furthermore, at step S87, the object detection section 95 checks the histogram stored in the histogram storage section 94, and determines whether the predetermined range is contained within a predetermined range of the feature quantity vector space around the feature quantity vector having the highest frequency. A feature quantity vector of the object supplied from the processing section 12 (see FIG. 3). In other words, in step S87, the object detection section 95 determines whether the distance between the feature amount vector having the highest frequency and the feature amount vector of the object supplied from the preprocessing section 12 is equal to or smaller than a predetermined value.

如上所述,当条形图存储部分94存储作为矢量量化结果的代码条形图时,对象检测部分95量化所获得的特征量矢量。在步骤S87,对象检测部分95确定作为矢量量化结果的代码是否与条形图存储部分94中存储的条形图的最高频率的代码相匹配。As described above, when the histogram storage section 94 stores the code histogram as a vector quantization result, the object detection section 95 quantizes the obtained feature quantity vector. In step S87 , the object detection section 95 determines whether the code that is the vector quantization result matches the code of the highest frequency of the histogram stored in the histogram storage section 94 .

当步骤S87上的确定结果表明具有最高频率的特征量矢量与预处理部分12所供给的对象的特征量矢量之间的距离不小于预定值(即,由于用户的癖好,预处理部分12供给的对象是用户不打算考虑的对象)时,流程前进到步骤S88。在步骤S88上,选择控制部分92控制MUX32(参见图7),使接收设备2用常规空间分辨率和常规时间分辨率显示一个图像。此后,流程返回到步骤S81。When the result of the determination at step S87 shows that the distance between the feature quantity vector having the highest frequency and the feature quantity vector of the object supplied by the preprocessing section 12 is not less than a predetermined value (that is, the distance between the feature quantity vector supplied by the preprocessing section 12 due to the user's preference When the object is an object that the user does not intend to consider), the flow advances to step S88. At step S88, the selection control section 92 controls the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7) to cause the receiving device 2 to display an image with normal spatial resolution and normal temporal resolution. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S81.

相反,当步骤S87上的确定结果表明具有最高频率的特征量矢量与预处理部分12所供给的对象的特征量矢量之间的距离等于或小于预定值(即,由于用户的癖好,预处理部分12供给的对象是用户打算考虑的对象)时,对象检测部分95把预处理部分12供给的对象的标志输出到选择控制部分92。此后,流程前进到步骤S89。On the contrary, when the result of the determination at step S87 shows that the distance between the feature quantity vector having the highest frequency and the feature quantity vector of the object supplied from the preprocessing section 12 is equal to or smaller than a predetermined value (that is, due to the user's preference, the preprocessing section 12, when the object supplied by the user is the object that the user intends to consider), the object detection section 95 outputs the flag of the object supplied by the preprocessing section 12 to the selection control section 92. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S89.

在步骤S89上,选择控制部分92控制MUX32(参见图7)以时间分辨率为代价改善具有从对象检测部分95供给的标志的对象的空间分辨率。此后,流程返回到步骤S81。At step S89 , the selection control section 92 controls the MUX 32 (see FIG. 7 ) to improve the spatial resolution of the object with the marker supplied from the object detection section 95 at the expense of temporal resolution. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S81.

因而,在这种情况下,接收设备2显示具有从对象检测部分95输出的标志的一个对象,以便以时间分辨率为代价提高其空间分辨率。此后,接收设备2连续显示具有高空间分辨率的对象。Thus, in this case, the receiving device 2 displays an object with the marker output from the object detection section 95 so as to increase its spatial resolution at the expense of temporal resolution. Thereafter, the receiving device 2 continuously displays objects with high spatial resolution.

结果,接收设备2自动地显示用户倾向考虑的对象,从而不需要用户控制(干预)控制信息输入装置24就可以提高对象的空间分辨率。此后,接收设备2连续显示高空间分辨率的对象(然而,在此情况下,正如上所述那样,图像的时间分辨率恶化)。As a result, the receiving apparatus 2 automatically displays the object that the user tends to consider, so that the spatial resolution of the object can be increased without the user controlling (intervention) controlling the information input device 24 . Thereafter, the receiving device 2 continuously displays objects of high spatial resolution (however, in this case, the temporal resolution of the image deteriorates as described above).

在条形图存储部分94中作为用户偏爱的学习结果存储的特征量矢量的条形图可以周期性地、非周期性地或相应于接收设备2的用户请求来重新设置。The bar graph of the feature quantity vector stored in the bar graph storage section 94 as a learning result of the user's preference may be reset periodically, aperiodically, or in response to a user's request of the receiving device 2 .

在上述情况下,其特征量矢量等于(匹配)或小于条形图最高频率的特征量矢量的对象的空间分辨率得到改善。另一方面,具有这样一种特征量矢量的所有对象的空间分辨率也得到改善:它的特征量矢量等于(匹配)或小于其条形图中的频率超过一个预定值的特征量矢量。In the above case, the spatial resolution of objects whose feature quantity vectors are equal to (matched) or smaller than the feature quantity vector of the highest frequency of the bar graph is improved. On the other hand, the spatial resolution is also improved for all objects having a feature amount vector whose feature amount vector is equal to (matches) or smaller than a feature amount vector whose frequency in the bar graph exceeds a predetermined value.

优先权范围是考虑点位于重心的一个预定范围(在上述情况下,优先权范围是一个矩形范围)。然而,也可以被说成:包含考虑点的一个矩形范围中的一个图像区域是用户有兴趣观看的一个图像区域(以下,把该区域称之为兴趣对象区域)。The priority range is a predetermined range where the consideration point is located at the center of gravity (in the above case, the priority range is a rectangular range). However, it can also be said that an image area within a rectangular range including the consideration point is an image area that the user is interested in viewing (hereinafter, this area is referred to as an interest object area).

另一方面,接收设备2显示的移动图像具有一个移动图像区域(以下,该区域可以称之为移动区域)和一个静止图像区域(以下,该区域可以称之为静止区域)。On the other hand, the moving image displayed by the receiving device 2 has a moving image area (hereinafter, this area may be referred to as a moving area) and a still image area (hereinafter, this area may be referred to as a still area).

为了改善兴趣对象区域的空间分辨率,必须在图像的移动区域或静止区域中认同(指定)用户正在考虑的兴趣对象区域。当用户正在考虑的兴趣对象区域可以被指定时,就可以获得用户未考虑的图像区域(例如,背景图像区域)。In order to improve the spatial resolution of the object of interest region, it is necessary to identify (specify) the object of interest region that the user is considering in the moving region or the stationary region of the image. When the region of the object of interest that the user is considering can be specified, an image region not considered by the user (for example, a background image region) can be obtained.

即使用户考虑的一个兴趣对象区域可以在一个特定时间被指定,此后也可以被改变。因而,当用户考虑的一个图像区域被改变到另一个图像区域时,必须把新图像区域认同为兴趣对象区域。Even if an interest object area considered by the user can be specified at a certain time, it can be changed thereafter. Thus, when one image area considered by the user is changed to another image area, the new image area must be identified as the object of interest area.

此外,可以存在多个用户考虑的兴趣对象区域。在这种情况下,必须分离地认同这些兴趣对象区域。In addition, there may be multiple interest object areas considered by the user. In this case, these object-of-interest regions must be identified separately.

于是图28示出了在便携式终端单元被用作图1所示的发送设备1和接收设备2的情况下图1所示的图像发送系统的第二结构的实例。在图28中,与图2相似的部分有相同的参考标号表示,并省略对它们的说明。换句话说,图28所示的图像发送系统的结构基本上与图2所示的图像发送系统的结构相同。28 shows an example of the second configuration of the image transmission system shown in FIG. 1 in the case where a portable terminal unit is used as the sending device 1 and the receiving device 2 shown in FIG. 1 . In FIG. 28, parts similar to those in FIG. 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted. In other words, the structure of the image transmission system shown in FIG. 28 is basically the same as that of the image transmission system shown in FIG. 2 .

在图2所示的实施例中,控制诸如用户正在考虑的考虑点的坐标的空间分辨率和时间分辨率所需的所有信息、空间分辨率、时间分辨率和传送速率作为控制信息从接收设备2发送到发送设备1。相反,根据图28所示的实施例,正如下面将要说明的那样,用户用接收设备2的按键部分2-3操作(点击)的显示部分2-2上所显示的图像的考虑点的信息作为控制信息被发送(在下文中,可以把考虑点上的信息称之为点击数据)。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, all the information needed to control such as the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the coordinates of the point of consideration that the user is considering, spatial resolution, temporal resolution and transmission rate are sent as control information from the receiving device 2 is sent to sending device 1. On the contrary, according to the embodiment shown in Fig. 28, as will be explained below, the information of the consideration point of the image displayed on the display section 2-2 operated (clicked) by the user with the key section 2-3 of the receiving device 2 is used as Control information is transmitted (hereinafter, the information on the considered point may be referred to as click data).

当发送设备1收到来自接收设备2的点击数据时,发送设备1相应于点击数据指定从接收设备2所显示的图像(该图像由发送设备1的摄像机部分1-1拍摄)中用户正在考虑的一个图像区域(兴趣对象区域),并控制发送给接收设备2的图像数据的信息量,以便当满足一个预定条件时改变指定图像区域的空间分辨率和时间分辨率。When the sending device 1 receives the click data from the receiving device 2, the sending device 1 specifies the image that the user is considering from the image displayed from the receiving device 2 (the image is captured by the camera section 1-1 of the sending device 1) corresponding to the click data. An image area (object area of interest) of the given image area, and controls the amount of information of the image data sent to the receiving device 2 so as to change the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the designated image area when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

下面图29示出了图28所示的发送设备1的结构实例。在图29中,与图3相似的部分由相同的参考标号表示,并省略对它们的说明。在图29所示的发送设备1中,背景图像提取部分1013、对象提取部分1014和发送处理部分1016被设置,以分别替代背景图像提取部分13、对象提取部分14和发送处理部分16。此外,接收设备2发送的点击数据不仅供应给与发送处理部分16相对应的发送处理部分1016,还供应给预处理部分12。除这些方面(要点)外,图29所示的发送设备1的结构大体上与图3所示的发送设备1的结构相同。然而,在图29所示的发送设备1中,背景图像提取部分1013的输出不供应给对象提取部分1014。相反,在图3所示的发送设备1中,背景图像提取部分13的输出被供应给对象提取部分14。此外,在图29所示的发送设备1中,对象提取部分1014的输出被供应给背景图像提取部分1013。相反,在图3所示的发送设备1中,对象提取部分14的输出不供应给背景图像提取部分13。FIG. 29 below shows a structural example of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 28 . In FIG. 29, parts similar to those in FIG. 3 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted. In transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 29 , background image extraction section 1013, object extraction section 1014, and transmission processing section 1016 are provided instead of background image extraction section 13, object extraction section 14, and transmission processing section 16, respectively. Furthermore, the click data transmitted by the reception device 2 is supplied not only to the transmission processing section 1016 corresponding to the transmission processing section 16 but also to the preprocessing section 12 . Except for these points (points), the configuration of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 29 is substantially the same as that of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 3 . However, in the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 29 , the output of the background image extraction section 1013 is not supplied to the object extraction section 1014 . In contrast, in the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 3 , the output of the background image extraction section 13 is supplied to the object extraction section 14 . Furthermore, in the transmitting device 1 shown in FIG. 29 , the output of the object extraction section 1014 is supplied to the background image extraction section 1013 . In contrast, in the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 3 , the output of the object extraction section 14 is not supplied to the background image extraction section 13 .

点击数据被供应给预处理部分12。在与处理部分12中,点击数据被供应给对象提取部分1014。对象提取部分1014提取(指定)接收设备2的用户从图像输入部分11所拍摄的图像中考虑的一个图像区域(兴趣对象区域),并把与提取的(指定的)兴趣对象区域相对应的图像数据供应给发送处理部分1016。当存在接收设备2的用户对图像输入部分11所拍摄的图像进行考虑的多个兴趣对象区域时,对象提取部分1014把多个兴趣对象区域的图像数据供应给发送处理部分1016。此外,对象提取部分1014所提取的兴趣对象区域的图像数据还被供应给附加信息计算部分15。Click data is supplied to the preprocessing section 12 . In the AND processing section 12 , the click data is supplied to the object extracting section 1014 . The object extracting section 1014 extracts (specifies) an image region (object of interest region) considered by the user of the receiving device 2 from the image captured by the image input section 11, and converts the image corresponding to the extracted (designated) object of interest region The data is supplied to the transmission processing section 1016 . When there are a plurality of object-of-interest areas in which the user of the receiving device 2 considers the image taken by the image input section 11 , the object extraction section 1014 supplies the image data of the object-of-interest areas of the plurality to the transmission processing section 1016 . Furthermore, the image data of the object region of interest extracted by the object extraction section 1014 is also supplied to the additional information calculation section 15 .

作为一个实例,用户进行考虑的兴趣对象区域是诸如一个实物的对象。下面,说明对象提取部分1014提取作为兴趣对象区域的一个实例的一个对象(以下称之为对象图像)的情况。应当注意的是兴趣对象区域不局限于一个对象。相反,一个兴趣对象区域可以是一个图像区域,而不是一个对象、一个对象中的一个图像区域、或背景图像部分(下面将进行说明)。然而,根据该实施例,将作为一个实例说明一个兴趣对象区域是一个对象的情况。下面将说明对象提取部分1014所执行的对象提取处理(兴趣对象区域指定处理)。As an example, the object of interest area considered by the user is an object such as a real object. Next, a case where the object extracting section 1014 extracts an object (hereinafter referred to as an object image) as an example of the object area of interest will be described. It should be noted that the object area of interest is not limited to one object. On the contrary, an object area of interest may be an image area instead of an object, an image area within an object, or a background image portion (described below). However, according to this embodiment, a case where one object of interest area is one object will be described as an example. The object extraction processing (interest object area designation processing) performed by the object extraction section 1014 will be described below.

背景图像提取部分1013相应于对象提取部分1014的对象提取结果从图像输入部分11供给的图像数据中提取与该图像一个背景图像的部分(即,除兴趣对象区域外的一个图像区域;以下把背景图像部分称之为背景图像)相对应的一个信号(以下称之为背景图像数据),并把提取的背景图像数据供应给发送处理部分1016和附加信息计算部分15。在该实例中,其活动性低(即,没有像图像那样的价值)的一个平面图像区域被处理为一个背景图像。当然,像没有价值的图像那样,背景图像可以是用户不感兴趣对象。在该实例中,为了简便起见,上述平面图像区域将被说成背景图像。The background image extracting part 1013 extracts a part of a background image with the image (that is, an image region other than the object region of interest; The image portion is referred to as a signal (hereinafter referred to as background image data) corresponding to the image portion, and the extracted background image data is supplied to the transmission processing section 1016 and the additional information calculation section 15. In this example, a planar image region whose activity is low (ie, has no image-like value) is processed as a background image. Of course, like images of no value, background images can be objects of no interest to the user. In this example, for the sake of brevity, the above-mentioned planar image area will be said to be a background image.

附加信息计算部分15相应于背景图像提取部分1013供给的背景图像数据检测代表背景图像移动的背景图像移动矢量(该背景图像的移动相当于沿着图像输入部分11的拍摄方向移动)。此外,附加信息计算部分15相应于对象提取部分1014供给的对象图像的图像数据(在下文中,把该图像数据称之为对象图像数据)检测代表对象移动的一个对象移动矢量。附加信息计算部分15把作为附加信息一部分的被检测的移动矢量供应给发送处理部分1016。此外,附加信息计算部分15相应于作为附加信息的从对象提取部分1014供给的对象图像数据,向发送处理部分1016供应关于对象的信息,比如由图像输入部分11拍摄的图像(帧)的对象位置和轮廓。换句话说,当对象提取部分1014从图像数据中提取一个对象图像时,对象提取部分1014还提取有关该对象的信息,比如对象的位置和轮廓,并把该信息供应给附加信息计算部分15。附加信息计算部分15把有关该对象的信息输出为附加信息。The additional information calculation section 15 detects a background image movement vector representing the movement of the background image corresponding to the background image data supplied from the background image extraction section 1013 (the movement of the background image corresponds to the movement along the photographing direction of the image input section 11). Furthermore, the additional information calculation section 15 detects an object movement vector representing the movement of the object corresponding to the image data of the object image supplied from the object extraction section 1014 (hereinafter, the image data is referred to as object image data). The additional information calculation section 15 supplies the detected motion vector as a part of the additional information to the transmission processing section 1016 . Further, the additional information calculation section 15 supplies information on the object such as the object position of the image (frame) captured by the image input section 11 to the transmission processing section 1016 corresponding to the object image data supplied from the object extraction section 1014 as additional information. and contour. In other words, when object extraction section 1014 extracts an object image from image data, object extraction section 1014 also extracts information about the object, such as the position and outline of the object, and supplies the information to additional information calculation section 15 . The additional information calculation section 15 outputs information on the object as additional information.

发送处理部分1016相应于接收设备2供给的点击数据对对象提取部分1014供应的对象图像数据、背景图像提取部分1013供应的背景图像数据、和附加信息计算部分15供应的附加信息进行编码,以便当接收设备2显示的图像的对象图像的空间分辨率被改善时,满足传送路径3的数据速率的条件。此后,发送处理部分1016多路复用该被编码的对象图像数据、编码的背景图像数据、和编码的附加信息,并且经传送路径3向接收设备2发送多路复用数据、帧速率信息等。The transmission processing section 1016 encodes the object image data supplied from the object extraction section 1014, the background image data supplied from the background image extraction section 1013, and the additional information supplied from the additional information calculation section 15 corresponding to the click data supplied from the receiving device 2, so that when When the spatial resolution of the object image of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 is improved, the condition of the data rate of the transmission path 3 is satisfied. Thereafter, the transmission processing section 1016 multiplexes the encoded object image data, the encoded background image data, and the encoded additional information, and transmits the multiplexed data, frame rate information, etc. to the reception device 2 via the transmission path 3 .

下面结合图30所示的流程图说明图29所示的发送设备1所执行的处理。The processing performed by the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 29 will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 30 .

在步骤S91,发送设备1把图像输入部分11获得的图像数据输入给预处理部分12。In step S91 , the transmitting device 1 inputs the image data obtained by the image input section 11 to the preprocessing section 12 .

此后,在步骤S92,发送设备1接收从接收设备2发送的点击数据,并把该点击数据输入给预处理部分12。Thereafter, the sending device 1 receives the click data sent from the receiving device 2 and inputs the click data to the preprocessing section 12 at step S92.

在步骤S93,已经接收到图像数据和点击数据的预处理部分12执行用于提取背景图像、对象和附加信息的预处理,并把在预处理中获得的背景图像数据、对象图像数据和附加信息供应给发送处理部分1016。In step S93, the preprocessing section 12 having received the image data and the click data performs preprocessing for extracting background images, objects, and additional information, and converts the background image data, object image data, and additional information obtained in the preprocessing to It is supplied to the transmission processing section 1016.

在步骤S94上,发送处理部分1016计算对象图像数据、背景图像数据和附加信息的数据量,以便满足传送路径3的数据速率的条件。此后,发送处理部分1016相应于该数据量对对象图像数据、背景图像数据、和附加信息进行编码,随后多路复用它们。此后,发送处理部分1016经传送路径3将多路复用的数据和帧速率信息发送给接收设备2。At step S94 , the transmission processing section 1016 calculates the data amounts of the object image data, the background image data, and the additional information so as to satisfy the condition of the data rate of the transmission path 3 . Thereafter, the transmission processing section 1016 encodes object image data, background image data, and additional information corresponding to the data amount, and then multiplexes them. Thereafter, the transmission processing section 1016 transmits the multiplexed data and frame rate information to the reception device 2 via the transmission path 3 .

此后,流程返回到步骤S1。在步骤S1上,发送设备1重复相似的处理。Thereafter, the flow returns to step S1. At step S1, the transmitting device 1 repeats similar processing.

图31示出了图28所示的接收设备2的结构实例。在图31中,与图5中相似的部分用相似的参考标号表示,并省略对它们的说明。换句话说,在图31所示的接收设备2中,设置一个组合处理部分1022,来代替组合处理部分22。此外,设置了点击数据输入部分1024和点击数据发送部分1025,来分别代替设置了控制信息输入部分24和控制信息发送部分25。除这些方面外,图28所示的接收设备2的结构基本上和图5所示的接收设备2的结构相同。FIG. 31 shows a structural example of the receiving device 2 shown in FIG. 28 . In FIG. 31, parts similar to those in FIG. 5 are denoted by like reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted. In other words, in the receiving apparatus 2 shown in FIG. 31 , a combination processing section 1022 is provided instead of the combination processing section 22 . Furthermore, a click data input section 1024 and a click data transmission section 1025 are provided instead of the control information input section 24 and the control information transmission section 25 respectively. Except for these points, the structure of the receiving device 2 shown in FIG. 28 is basically the same as that of the receiving device 2 shown in FIG. 5 .

发送设备1经传送路径3发送的多路复用数据被接收处理部分21接收。接收处理部分21把接收的多路复用数据分离成编码背景图像数据、编码对象图像数据、和编码附加信息数据,并对分离的数据进行解码。此后,接收处理部分21把解码的背景图像数据、对象图像数据和附加信息供应给组合处理部分1022。The multiplexed data transmitted by the transmission device 1 via the transmission path 3 is received by the reception processing section 21 . The reception processing section 21 separates the received multiplexed data into coded background image data, coded object image data, and coded additional information data, and decodes the separated data. Thereafter, the reception processing section 21 supplies the decoded background image data, object image data, and additional information to the combination processing section 1022 .

组合处理部分1022组和解码的背景图像数据、对象图像数据和附加信息,并把该组合的图像信号供应给图像输出部分23。此外,组合处理部分1022相应于点击数据输入部分1024供应的点击数据控制组合的图像的空间分辨率和时间分辨率。The combination processing section 1022 groups and decodes the background image data, object image data, and additional information, and supplies the combined image signal to the image output section 23 . Furthermore, the combination processing section 1022 controls the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the combined image corresponding to the click data supplied from the click data input section 1024 .

点击数据输入部分1024相应于用户进行的按键部分2-3的操作生成代表点击位置(坐标位置)和点击时间的点击数据。按键部分2-3作为一个指点装置,用于指定在相当于接收设备2(参见图28)的显示部分2-2的图像输出部分23上显示的图像的坐标位置。换句话说,当用户为图像输出部分23上显示的图像的预期图像位置(兴趣对象区域)点击按键部分2-3时,点击数据输入部分1024生成点击数据,它代表点击位置的坐标信息和点击时间。点击数据输入部分1024生成的点击数据被发送给组合处理部分1022和点击数据发送部分1025。The click data input section 1024 generates click data representing the click position (coordinate position) and click time corresponding to the operation of the key section 2-3 by the user. The key section 2-3 serves as a pointing means for specifying the coordinate position of an image displayed on the image output section 23 corresponding to the display section 2-2 of the receiving apparatus 2 (see FIG. 28). In other words, when the user clicks the button section 2-3 for an expected image position (object area of interest) of an image displayed on the image output section 23, the click data input section 1024 generates click data representing coordinate information of the clicked position and the clicked position. time. The click data generated by the click data input section 1024 is sent to the combination processing section 1022 and the click data sending section 1025 .

当点击数据发送部分1025接收到来自点击数据输入部分1024的点击数据时,点击数据发送部分1025经传送路径3把该点击数据发送给发送设备1。When click data transmission section 1025 receives click data from click data input section 1024 , click data transmission section 1025 transmits the click data to transmission device 1 via transmission path 3 .

下面结合图32所示的流程图简要说明由图31所示的接收设备2执行的处理。Processing performed by the receiving apparatus 2 shown in FIG. 31 will be briefly described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 32 .

首先,在步骤S101,接收设备2接收发送设备1经传送路径3发送的多路复用数据。First, in step S101 , the reception device 2 receives multiplexed data transmitted by the transmission device 1 via the transmission path 3 .

在步骤S102,接收处理部分21将多路复用数据分离成编码背景图像数据、编码对象图像数据、和编码附加信息数据,并对分离的编码数据进行解码。该解码的背景图像数据、对象图像数据和附加信息被发送给组合处理部分1022。In step S102, the reception processing section 21 separates the multiplexed data into coded background image data, coded object image data, and coded additional information data, and decodes the separated coded data. The decoded background image data, object image data, and additional information are sent to the combination processing section 1022 .

在步骤S103上,在接收设备2中,点击数据输入部分1024获得与用户进行的按键部分2-3的点击操作相对应的点击数据,并把点击数据供应给组合处理部分1022和点击数据发送部分1025。这样,该点击数据就从点击数据发送部分1025发送到发送设备1。At step S103, in the reception device 2, the click data input section 1024 obtains click data corresponding to the click operation of the key section 2-3 by the user, and supplies the click data to the combination processing section 1022 and the click data transmission section 1025. Thus, the click data is sent from the click data sending section 1025 to the sending device 1 .

在步骤S104,组合处理部分1022相应于接收处理部分21供给的背景图像数据、对象图像数据、和附加信息以及点击数据输入部分1024供给的点击数据组合一个图像并控制该组合图像的空间分辨率及时间分辨率。发送设备1可以把接收设备2发送的点击数据放置在多路复用数据的首部信息中,并把合成的首部信息发送给接收设备2。在此情况下,接收设备2的组合处理部分1022可以从首部信息中获得点击数据。因而,不需要将该点击数据从点击数据输入部分1024供应给组合处理部分1022。In step S104, the combination processing section 1022 combines an image corresponding to the background image data, object image data, and additional information supplied from the reception processing section 21 and the click data supplied from the click data input section 1024 and controls the spatial resolution and the spatial resolution of the combined image. Time resolution. The sending device 1 may put the click data sent by the receiving device 2 into the header information of the multiplexed data, and send the synthesized header information to the receiving device 2 . In this case, the combination processing section 1022 of the reception device 2 can obtain the click data from the header information. Thus, there is no need to supply the click data from the click data input section 1024 to the combination processing section 1022 .

在步骤S105,在图像输出部分23的液晶显示器或类似物上显示由组合处理部分1022组合的图像。In step S105, the image combined by the combining processing section 1022 is displayed on a liquid crystal display of the image output section 23 or the like.

此后,流程返回到步骤S101。在步骤S101上,接收设备2重复相似的处理。Thereafter, the flow returns to step S101. At step S101, the receiving device 2 repeats similar processing.

图33示出了图29所示的发送设备1的发送处理部分1016的真实(实际)的结构实例。在图33中,与图7相似的部分用相似的参考标号表示,并省略对它们的说明。换句话说,除了图33所示的发送处理部分1016把点击数据而不是整个控制信息供应给控制部分35外,图33所示的发送处理部分1016的结构基本上与图7所示的发送处理部分1016的结构相同。FIG. 33 shows a real (actual) structural example of transmission processing section 1016 of transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 29 . In FIG. 33, parts similar to those in FIG. 7 are denoted by like reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted. In other words, the configuration of the transmission processing section 1016 shown in FIG. 33 is basically the same as that of the transmission processing shown in FIG. 7 except that the transmission processing section 1016 shown in FIG. Section 1016 has the same structure.

在图33中,背景图像数据、对象图像数据、和附加信息从图29所示的预处理部分12供应给发送处理部分1016。背景图像数据、对象图像数据和附加信息被输入给编码部分31和控制部分35。编码部分31按上述方式对供应的背景图像数据、对象图像数据和附加信息进行编码,并把得到的编码数据供应给MUX32。MUX32在控制部分35的控制下选择编码的背景图像数据、编码的对象图像数据和编码的附加信息数据,并把选择的数据作为多路复用数据供应给发送部分33。发送部分33相应于传送路径3的传送标准把MUX32供给的多路复用数据调制为下游部分(下行数据流),并经过传送路径3向接收设备2发送调制的数据。In FIG. 33 , background image data, object image data, and additional information are supplied to the transmission processing section 1016 from the preprocessing section 12 shown in FIG. 29 . Background image data, object image data, and additional information are input to the coding section 31 and the control section 35 . The encoding section 31 encodes the supplied background image data, object image data, and additional information in the above-described manner, and supplies the resulting encoded data to the MUX 32 . The MUX 32 selects encoded background image data, encoded object image data, and encoded additional information data under the control of the control section 35 , and supplies the selected data to the transmission section 33 as multiplexed data. The transmission section 33 modulates the multiplexed data supplied from the MUX 32 into a downstream portion (downstream) corresponding to the transmission standard of the transmission path 3, and transmits the modulated data to the reception device 2 via the transmission path 3.

另一方面,控制部分35控制从MUX32供应的多路复用数据的输出,,使数据量计算部分34供应的数据速率不超过传送路径3的传送速率。此外,控制部分35经传送路径3接收从接收设备2发送的点击数据,并相应于点击数据控制MUX32选择和多路复用编码的数据。On the other hand, the control section 35 controls the output of the multiplexed data supplied from the MUX 32 so that the data rate supplied from the data amount calculation section 34 does not exceed the transmission rate of the transmission path 3 . Further, the control section 35 receives the click data sent from the receiving device 2 via the transmission path 3, and controls the MUX 32 to select and multiplex encoded data corresponding to the click data.

下面,结合图34所示的流程图由说明图33所示的发送处理部分1016执行的发送处理。Next, transmission processing performed by the transmission processing section 1016 shown in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 34 .

首先,在步骤S111,发送处理部分1016的控制部分35确定点击数据是否已从接收设备2发送。当步骤S111上的确定结果表明接收设备2未发送点击数据(即,控制部分35未接收到点击数据)时,流程前进到步骤S112。在步骤S112,和图10所示的步骤S22的情况一样,控制部分35控制MUX32选择编码的背景图像数据、编码对象数据和编码附加信息数据,并多路复用该选择的数据,以便接收设备2可以用常规时间分辨率显示一个图像。First, in step S111 , the control section 35 of the transmission processing section 1016 determines whether click data has been transmitted from the reception device 2 . When the determined result at step S111 indicates that the receiving device 2 has not transmitted click data (ie, the control section 35 has not received click data), the flow advances to step S112. In step S112, as in the case of step S22 shown in FIG. 10, the control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to select encoded background image data, encoded object data, and encoded additional information data, and multiplex the selected data so that the receiving device 2 can display an image with conventional temporal resolution.

此后,流程前进到步骤S113。在步骤S113上,发送处理部分1016从发送部分33经传送路径3发送MUX32供应的多路复用数据。此后,流程返回到步骤S111。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S113. At step S113 , the transmission processing section 1016 transmits the multiplexed data supplied from the MUX 32 from the transmission section 33 via the transmission path 3 . Thereafter, the flow returns to step S111.

当步骤S111上的确定结果表明接收设备2已经发送点击数据(即,控制部分35已经接收到点击数据)时,流程前进到步骤S114。在步骤S114上,控制部分35相应于点击数据认同用户已经用接收设备2的按键部分2-3指定的一个考虑点的坐标(点击位置)和点击时间。When the determined result at step S111 indicates that the receiving device 2 has transmitted the click data (ie, the control section 35 has received the click data), the flow advances to step S114. At step S114, the control section 35 recognizes the coordinates (click position) and click time of a point of consideration that the user has specified with the key section 2-3 of the receiving device 2 corresponding to the click data.

此后,在步骤S115上,控制部分35相应于考虑点的坐标(点击位置)和点击时间按下面将要描述的方式指定接收设备2方的用户考虑的兴趣对象区域,把兴趣对象区域指定为其空间分辨率被优先改善的一个图像的优先权范围,并检测优先权范围内的一个图像以及其附加信息。在这种情况下,优先权范围内的图像是对象图像。非优先权范围内的一个图像是例如像不感兴趣对象区域内的一个背景图像那样的一个图像。Thereafter, at step S115, the control section 35 designates the interest object area considered by the user on the receiving device 2 side in a manner to be described below corresponding to the coordinates (click position) and click time of the considered point, designates the interest object area as its space A priority range of an image whose resolution is preferentially improved, and an image within the priority range and its additional information are detected. In this case, the image within the priority range is the object image. An image in the non-priority range is, for example, an image like a background image in the area of uninteresting objects.

此后,在步骤S116上,控制部分35控制MUX32选择优先权范围内的图像(对象图像)、非优先权范围内的一个图像(背景图像)以及附加信息的编码数据,并多路复用它们。换句话说,当控制部分35接收到来自接收设备2的点击数据时,像图10所示的步骤S26上情况那样,控制部分35控制MUX32,以便优先权范围内的图像的空间分辨率以时间分辨率为代价得到改善。Thereafter, at step S116, the control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to select an image in the priority range (object image), an image in the non-priority range (background image), and coded data of additional information, and multiplex them. In other words, when the control section 35 receives the click data from the receiving device 2, as in the case of step S26 shown in FIG. Resolution has been improved at the expense of.

此外,在步骤S116上,控制部分35控制MUX32把高分辨率信息作为优先权范围的位置和尺寸信息插入到被选作多路复用数据的附加信息中。此后,流程前进到步骤S113。Further, at step S116, the control section 35 controls the MUX 32 to insert high-resolution information as the position and size information of the priority range into the additional information selected as the multiplexed data. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S113.

在步骤S113上,发送设备33经传送路径3发送MUX32输出的多路复用数据。此后,流程返回到步骤S111。At step S113 , the transmission device 33 transmits the multiplexed data output by the MUX 32 via the transmission path 3 . Thereafter, the flow returns to step S111.

如上述的那样,在图34所示的发送处理中,执行和图10所示的处理相似的处理。因而,当接收设备2的用户为了包含考虑点上的优先权分为内的图像而连续地操作点击数据输入部分1024(例如,他和她连续地指定相同的考虑点)时,优先发送改善空间分辨率的数据。因而,包含考虑点的优先权范围内的图像的空间分辨率被逐渐改善。结果优先权范围内的图像被更加清晰地显示了。换句话说,接收设备2侧的用户进行考虑的一个图像(一个兴趣对象区域和一个对象图像)被更加清楚地显示。As described above, in the transmission processing shown in FIG. 34 , processing similar to the processing shown in FIG. 10 is executed. Thus, when the user of the receiving device 2 continuously operates the click data input section 1024 for images containing the priority points on the consideration points (for example, he and she continuously designate the same consideration point), the room for improvement is preferentially transmitted. resolution data. Thus, the spatial resolution of images within the priority range containing the point of consideration is gradually improved. As a result, images within the priority range are displayed more clearly. In other words, an image (an object area of interest and an object image) considered by the user on the receiving device 2 side is displayed more clearly.

如上所述,图像数据的传送相应于传送路径3的传送速率进行控制,以便优先权范围内的图像(一个兴趣对象区域和一个对象图像)的空间分辨率和时间分辨率在分辨率的范围内变化。因而,在有限的传送速率下,可以进一步改善与接收设备2所显示的一个考虑点相对应的一个对象图像的空间分辨率。换句话说,由于优先权范围内的对象图像的空间分辨率以图像的时间分辨率为代价得到改善,因此可以以有限传送速率更加清楚地显示在接收设备2上显示的对象图像(即,空间分辨率可以被进一步改善)。As described above, the transmission of the image data is controlled corresponding to the transmission rate of the transmission path 3 so that the spatial resolution and temporal resolution of the images (one object region of interest and one object image) within the priority range are within the range of resolution Variety. Thus, at a limited transmission rate, the spatial resolution of an object image corresponding to a point of interest displayed by the receiving device 2 can be further improved. In other words, since the spatial resolution of the object image within the priority range is improved at the expense of the temporal resolution of the image, the object image displayed on the receiving device 2 (i.e., spatial resolution) can be displayed more clearly at a limited transmission rate. resolution can be further improved).

下面图35示出了图31所示的组合处理部分1022的结构的实例。在图35中,和图13所示的部分相同的部分由相同的参考标号表示,并省略对它们的说明。换句话说,组合处理部分1022中不设置背景图像标志存储器74。组合处理部分1022中设置的是组合部分1077而不是组合部分77。此外,供给组合部分1077的是点击数据而不是控制信息。除了这些方面外,图35所示的组合处理部分1022的结构基本上与图13所示的组合部分22的结构相同。FIG. 35 below shows an example of the structure of the combination processing section 1022 shown in FIG. 31 . In FIG. 35, the same parts as those shown in FIG. 13 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their descriptions are omitted. In other words, the background image flag memory 74 is not provided in the combination processing section 1022 . What is provided in the combination processing section 1022 is a combination section 1077 instead of the combination section 77 . Also, what is supplied to the combination section 1077 is click data instead of control information. Except for these points, the structure of the combining processing section 1022 shown in FIG. 35 is basically the same as that of the combining section 22 shown in FIG. 13 .

参见图35,接收处理部分21(参见图31)输出的背景图像数据被输入给背景图像写入部分71。接收处理部分21输出的对象图像数据被输入给对象写入部分72。接收处理部分21输出的附加信息被输入给背景图像写入部分71、对象写入部分72和组合部分1077。Referring to FIG. 35 , the background image data output by the reception processing section 21 (see FIG. 31 ) is input to the background image writing section 71 . The object image data output by the reception processing section 21 is input to the object writing section 72 . The additional information output by the reception processing section 21 is input to the background image writing section 71 , the object writing section 72 and the combining section 1077 .

背景图像写入部分71把供给的背景图像数据连续地写入背景图像存储器73。然而,在图35所示的实施例中,未设置图13所示实施例的背景图像标志存储器74。因而,在图35中,当背景图像写入部分71把背景图像数据写到背景图像存储器73上时,背景图像写入部分71不核对一个背景图像标志。The background image writing section 71 continuously writes the supplied background image data into the background image memory 73 . However, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 35, the background image flag memory 74 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 is not provided. Thus, in FIG. 35, when the background image writing section 71 writes the background image data on the background image memory 73, the background image writing section 71 does not check a background image flag.

组合部分1077相应于附加信息中包含的背景图像移动矢量从背景图像存储器73中存储的背景图像数据中读出在当前时间(当前帧)显示的帧的一个背景图像,相应于附加信息中包含的一个对象移动矢量将对象存储器75中存储的一个对象图像与该背景图像相组合,并把当前帧的组合图像供应给显示存储器78。The combining section 1077 reads out a background image of the frame displayed at the current time (current frame) from the background image data stored in the background image memory 73 corresponding to the background image movement vector contained in the additional information, corresponding to the background image contained in the additional information. An object movement vector combines an object image stored in the object memory 75 with the background image, and supplies the combined image of the current frame to the display memory 78 .

此外,当组合部分1077接收到来自图31所示的点击数据输入部分1024的点击数据时,组合部分1077从对象存储器75中读出包含一个考虑点坐标位置的对象图像数据,该考虑点被包含在点击数据中,并把获得的对象图像数据供应给子窗口存储器79。Furthermore, when the combination section 1077 receives the click data from the click data input section 1024 shown in FIG. Among the click data, and the obtained object image data is supplied to the sub-window memory 79 .

下面结合图36所示的流程图说明图35所示的组合处理部分1022所执行的处理(组合处理)。Processing (combination processing) executed by the combination processing section 1022 shown in FIG. 35 will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 36 .

首先,在步骤S121上,对象写入部分72相应于对象存储器75中存储的一个对象标识按上述方式写入图35所示的解码部分53所供应的对象图像数据。First, at step S121, the object writing section 72 writes object image data supplied from the decoding section 53 shown in FIG.

此后,流程前进到步骤S122。对象写入部分72确定附加信息是否包含高分辨率信息。当步骤S122上的确定结果表明附加信息包含高分辨率信息(即,接收设备2的用户已经操作按键部分2-3,点击数据已经发送给发送设备1,并且发送设备1随后为优先权范围内的一个图像发送具有高空间分辨率的对象图像数据)时,流程前进到步骤S123。在步骤S123上,对象写入部分72将对象标志存储器76的相关对象标志调整到“1”。Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S122. The object writing section 72 determines whether the additional information contains high-resolution information. When the determined result at step S122 shows that the additional information contains high-resolution information (that is, the user of the receiving device 2 has operated the key part 2-3, the click data has been sent to the sending device 1, and the sending device 1 is subsequently within the priority range When one image of the object image data having a high spatial resolution is sent), the flow proceeds to step S123. At step S123, the object writing section 72 sets the relevant object flag of the object flag memory 76 to "1".

换句话说,当发送设备1已经为优先权范围内的图像发送具有高空间分辨率的对象图像数据时,在步骤S121上,具有高空间分辨率的对象图像数据被写入对象存储器75。因而,在步骤S123上,组成具有高空间分辨率的对象的像素的对象标志被调整到“1”。In other words, when the transmitting device 1 has transmitted object image data having a high spatial resolution for images within the priority range, the object image data having a high spatial resolution is written in the object memory 75 at step S121. Thus, at step S123, the object flags of the pixels constituting the object with high spatial resolution are adjusted to "1".

此后,流程前进到步骤S124。在步骤S124上,组合部分1077从对象存储器75中读出优先权范围内的对象图像数据,并把获得的对象图像数据写入到子窗口存储器79。Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S124. At step S124 , the combining section 1077 reads out the object image data within the priority range from the object memory 75 , and writes the obtained object image data into the sub-window memory 79 .

换句话说,当步骤S122上的确定结果表明附加信息包含高分辨率信息时,则如上述的那样,用户已经操作按键部分2-3,点击数据已经发送给发送设备1,并且发送设备1随后为优先权范围内的一个图像发送具有高空间分辨率的对象图像数据。发送给发送设备1的点击数据还供应给组合部分1077。当组合部分1077接收到点击数据时,在步骤S124上,组合部分1077相应于包含在点击数据中的考虑点的坐标和点击时间认同优先权范围,从对象存储器75中读出已从发送设备1发送的在优先权范围内的具有高空间分辨率的一个对象,并把获得的对象写到子窗口存储器79。此外,如上所述的那样,当发送设备1发送的首部信息包含点击数据时,组合部分1077可以依据首部信息中包含的点击数据认同该优先权范围。In other words, when the determined result at step S122 indicates that the additional information contains high-resolution information, as described above, the user has operated the key portion 2-3, the click data has been transmitted to the transmission device 1, and the transmission device 1 subsequently Send object image data with high spatial resolution for an image within the priority range. The click data sent to the sending device 1 is also supplied to the combining section 1077 . When the combination part 1077 receives the click data, at step S124, the combination part 1077 agrees with the priority range corresponding to the coordinates and the click time of the point of consideration contained in the click data, and reads out from the object memory 75 that has been sent from the transmission device 1. Send an object with high spatial resolution within the priority range and write the obtained object to the sub-window memory 79 . In addition, as described above, when the header information sent by the sending device 1 includes click data, the combining part 1077 can identify the priority range according to the click data included in the header information.

此后,流程前进到步骤S125。在步骤S125上,组合部分1077相应于附加信息中包含的背景图像移动矢量从背景图像存储器73中读出当前帧的背景图像数据。此外,组合部分1077从对象存储器75中读出显示的当前帧的对象图像数据。此后,组合部分1077相应于附加信息中包含的一个对象移动矢量将当前帧的背景图像数据与已经从对象存储器75中读出的对象图像数据相组合,并把该当前帧的组合图像写到显示存储器78。换句话说,组合部分1077把背景图像数据写入到显示存储器78,然后将对象图像数据覆盖写到显示存储器78。结果,组合部分1077将已经组合了背景图像和对象图像的当前帧的图像数据写入到显示存储器78。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S125. At step S125, the combining section 1077 reads out the background image data of the current frame from the background image memory 73 corresponding to the background image movement vector contained in the additional information. Furthermore, the combining section 1077 reads out the object image data of the displayed current frame from the object memory 75 . Thereafter, the combination section 1077 combines the background image data of the current frame with the object image data that has been read out from the object memory 75 corresponding to an object movement vector contained in the additional information, and writes the combined image of the current frame to the display memory 78. In other words, the combining section 1077 writes the background image data to the display memory 78 and then overwrites the object image data to the display memory 78 . As a result, the combining section 1077 writes, to the display memory 78, the image data of the current frame in which the background image and the object image have been combined.

在上述方式中,写入到显示存储器78的当前帧的图像数据和写入到子窗口存储器79的对象图像数据被供应给图31所示的图像输入部分23,并在其上显示。In the manner described above, the image data of the current frame written to the display memory 78 and the object image data written to the sub-window memory 79 are supplied to and displayed on the image input section 23 shown in FIG. 31 .

相反,当步骤S122上的确定结果表明附加信息不包含高分辨率信息(即,接收设备2的用户还未操作按键部分2-3),流程前进到步骤S125,跳过步骤S123和S124。如上所述的那样,在步骤S125,组合部分1077从背景图像存储器73读出当前帧的背景图像数据,从对象存储器75中读出所需的对象图像数据,并相应于附加信息将当前帧的背景图像和已经从对象存储器75中读出的对象图像数据进行组合。结果,当前帧的图像数据被形成并被写入到显示存储器78。此后,流程返回到步骤S121。在步骤S121上,组合部分1077重复相似的处理。In contrast, when the determined result at step S122 indicates that the additional information does not contain high-resolution information (ie, the user of the receiving device 2 has not operated the key portion 2-3), the flow advances to step S125, skipping steps S123 and S124. As described above, in step S125, the combination section 1077 reads out the background image data of the current frame from the background image memory 73, reads out the required object image data from the object memory 75, and converts the current frame's image data corresponding to the additional information. The background image and the object image data that has been read out from the object memory 75 are combined. As a result, image data for the current frame is formed and written to the display memory 78 . Thereafter, the flow returns to step S121. At step S121, the combining section 1077 repeats similar processing.

根据上述的组合处理,按照和结合图15所述情况相同的方式,显示用户考虑作为一个对象的具有高空间分辨率的一个图像。图35所示的组合处理部分1022没有图13所示的背景图像标志存储器74。因此,图35所示的背景图像写入部分71总是把供应的背景图像数据写入到背景图像存储器73。因此,在图36所示的组合处理中,背景图像的空间分辨率不像参考图13至15所述的情况那样能够得到改善。According to the combination processing described above, in the same manner as the case described in conjunction with FIG. 15, an image with a high spatial resolution that the user considers as an object is displayed. The combination processing section 1022 shown in FIG. 35 does not have the background image flag memory 74 shown in FIG. 13 . Therefore, the background image writing section 71 shown in FIG. 35 always writes the supplied background image data to the background image memory 73 . Therefore, in the combination processing shown in FIG. 36 , the spatial resolution of the background image cannot be improved as in the cases described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 .

下面,将说明相应于从接收设备2供给的点击数据提取对象图像(兴趣对象区域)的方法。该方法由图29所示的对象提取部分1044执行。Next, a method of extracting an object image (object area of interest) corresponding to the click data supplied from the receiving device 2 will be explained. This method is executed by the object extraction section 1044 shown in FIG. 29 .

图37示出了图29所示的预处理部分12的对象提取部分1014的结构实例。FIG. 37 shows a structural example of the object extraction section 1014 of the preprocessing section 12 shown in FIG. 29 .

在图37中,图29所示的图像输入部分11所供应的图像数据被存储到图像存储器201。该图像数据从图像存储器201中读出,并供应给静止区域和移动区域确定部分203的公共端、对象图像提取部分213和选择开关207。图像存储器201存储静止区域和移动区域确定部分203进行静止区域和移动区域确定所需的至少几个帧的图像数据,该静止区域和移动区域确定部分203是图像存储器201的一个下游部分。In FIG. 37 , image data supplied from the image input section 11 shown in FIG. 29 is stored in the image memory 201 . The image data is read out from the image memory 201 and supplied to the common terminal of the still area and moving area determining section 203 , the object image extracting section 213 and the selection switch 207 . The image memory 201 stores image data of at least several frames required for still area and moving area determination by the still area and moving area determination section 203 , which is a downstream portion of the image memory 201 .

此外,接收设备2经传送路径3发送的点击数据被存储到点击数据存储器202。该点击数据从点击数据存储器202中读出并供应给静止区域和移动区域确定部分204的公共端、连续点击确定部分204和选择开关206。点击数据存储器202存储在作为点击数据存储器202的一个下游部分的连续点击确定部分204所执行的连续点击确定一个预定时间周期(例如,大于500到700毫秒)所需的点击数据。Furthermore, the click data transmitted by the receiving device 2 via the transmission path 3 is stored in the click data memory 202 . The click data is read from the click data memory 202 and supplied to the common terminal of the still area and moving area determination section 204 , the continuous click determination section 204 and the selection switch 206 . Click data storage 202 stores click data required for continuous click determination for a predetermined period of time (for example, more than 500 to 700 milliseconds) performed by continuous click determination section 204 which is a downstream portion of click data storage 202 .

静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定由接收设备2发送的当前点击数据所代表的点击位置(图像上的坐标值)周围的局部小块的图像区域(例如,16×16像素)是移动区域还是静止区域。换句话说,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203为点击位置周围的16×16个像素获得当前帧的图像区域与一个过去帧的图像区域之间的差值,该过去帧先于当前帧几个帧(以下,把该过去帧称为过去帧)。当帧间的差值等于或小于预定阈值时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定该图像区域是静止区域。相反,当该差值大于预定阈值时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定该图像区域是移动区域。当处理彩色图像时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203为R、G和B的每一个的16×16个像素的图像获得当前帧的图像区域与过去帧的图像区域之间的差值。当为R、G、B获得的帧差值的绝对值的平均值等于或小于一个预定阈值(例如,等于或小于10)时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定该图像区域是静止区域。相反,当该平均值大于预定阈值时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定该图像区域是一个移动区域。当移动区域和静止区域确定部分203确定图像区域是一个静止区域时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是静止点击(静止区域中的一个点击)。当静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定图像区域是一个移动区域时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是移动点击(移动区域中的一个点击)。此后,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203向处理确定部分205发送作为静止区域和移动区域确定结果的表示静止点击和移动点击的信息。The static area and the moving area determining part 203 determine whether the image area (for example, 16×16 pixels) of the local small block around the click position (coordinate value on the image) represented by the current click data sent by the receiving device 2 is a moving area or a moving area. static area. In other words, the still area and moving area determination section 203 obtains the difference between the image area of the current frame and the image area of one past frame, which is several times earlier than the current frame, for 16×16 pixels around the clicked position. frame (hereinafter, this past frame is referred to as a past frame). When the difference between frames is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold, the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines that the image area is a still area. On the contrary, when the difference is greater than a predetermined threshold, the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines that the image area is a moving area. When processing a color image, the still area and moving area determining section 203 obtains the difference between the image area of the current frame and the image area of the past frame for each of R, G, and B images of 16×16 pixels. When the average value of the absolute values of frame differences obtained for R, G, B is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold (for example, equal to or smaller than 10), the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines that the image area is a still area. On the contrary, when the average value is greater than a predetermined threshold, the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines that the image area is a moving area. When the moving area and still area determining section 203 determines that the image area is a still area, the still area and moving area determining section 203 determines that the current click data output from the click data memory 202 is a still click (a click in the still area). When the still area and moving area determining section 203 determines that the image area is a moving area, the still area and moving area determining section 203 determines that the current click data output from the click data memory 202 is a moving click (a click in the moving area). Thereafter, the still area and moving area determining section 203 sends to the process determining section 205 information representing a still click and a moving click as a result of the still area and moving area determination.

连续点击确定部分204相应于从接收设备2发送的点击数据的点击时间确定接收设备2的用户是否已经连续执行点击操作。换句话说,连续点击确定部分204获得接收设备2发送的当前点击数据的点击时间与前一点击数据的点击时间之间的时间差(即,点击时间间隔)。当该时间差等于或小于预定阈值时,连续点击确定部分204确定用户未执行连续点击操作。当连续点击确定部分204确定用户已经执行连续点击操作时,连续点击确定部分204按连续点击处理从点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据。相反,连续点击确定部分204确定用户还未执行连续点击操作(即,当前点击时间与前一点击时间之间的时间差等于或小于预定阈值)时,连续点击确定部分204按非连续点击处理从点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据。此后,连续点击确定部分204向处理确定部分205发送作为连续点击确定结果的表示连续点击或非连续点击的信息。The continuous click determination section 204 determines whether or not the user of the receiving device 2 has continuously performed click operations corresponding to the click time of the click data transmitted from the receiving device 2 . In other words, the continuous click determination section 204 obtains the time difference (ie, the click time interval) between the click time of the current click data sent by the receiving device 2 and the click time of the previous click data. When the time difference is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold, the continuous click determination section 204 determines that the user has not performed a continuous click operation. When the continuous click determination section 204 determines that the user has performed a continuous click operation, the continuous click determination section 204 processes the current click data output from the click data memory 202 as continuous clicks. On the contrary, when the continuous click determination part 204 determines that the user has not yet performed a continuous click operation (that is, the time difference between the current click time and the previous click time is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold), the continuous click determination part 204 processes the click from the click as a non-continuous click. The current click data output by the data memory 202 . Thereafter, the continuous click determination section 204 transmits to the process determination section 205 information indicating continuous clicks or discontinuous clicks as a result of the continuous click determination.

处理确定部分205相应于静止区域和移动区域确定部分203的静止区域和移动区域确定结果和连续点击确定部分204的连续点击确定结果控制选择开关206、选择开关207和选择开关208。The processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 206 , the selection switch 207 and the selection switch 208 corresponding to the still area and moving area determination results of the still area and moving area determination section 203 and the continuous click determination results of the continuous click determination section 204 .

换句话说,相应于静止区域和移动区域确定结果和连续点击确定结果,当点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是静止点击和连续点击时,处理确定部分205控制选择开关206,使点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据被发送给静止对象连接处理部分211。此外,处理确定部分205控制选择开关207,使图像存储器201输出的图像数据被发送给静止图像连接处理部分211。然而,处理确定部分205控制选择开关208,使对象提取结果存储器214输出的前一点击数据(后面将要说明)、分配给该点击数据的对象号(相当于上述的标志,并归类(标识)对象)和与该对象号相对应的对象图像数据发送给静止对象连接处理部分211。In other words, corresponding to the still area and moving area determination results and the continuous click determination results, when the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is a still click and a continuous click, the processing determination part 205 controls the selection switch 206 so that the click data memory The current click data output at 202 is sent to the stationary object connection processing section 211 . Furthermore, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 207 so that the image data output from the image memory 201 is sent to the still image connection processing section 211 . However, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 208 so that the previous click data (to be described later) output by the object extraction result memory 214, the object number (equivalent to the above-mentioned flags) assigned to the click data, and classified (identified) object) and the object image data corresponding to the object number are sent to the stationary object connection processing section 211.

此外,相应于静止区域和移动区域确定结果和连续点击确定结果,当点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是一个移动点击和一个连续点击时,处理确定部分205控制选择开关206,使点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据发送给移动对象连接处理部分210。此外,处理确定部分205控制选择开关207,使图像存储器201输出的图像数据发送给移动对象连接处理部分210。此外,处理确定部分205控制选择开关208,使对象提取结果存储器214输出的前一单击数据(后面将进行说明)、分配给该点击数据的对象号、和对应于该对象号的对象图像数据发送给移动对象连接处理部分210。In addition, corresponding to the static area and moving area determination results and continuous click determination results, when the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is a moving click and a continuous click, the processing determination part 205 controls the selection switch 206 so that the click data memory The current click data output at 202 is sent to the mobile object connection processing section 210 . Furthermore, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 207 so that the image data output from the image memory 201 is sent to the mobile object connection processing section 210 . Furthermore, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 208 so that the previous click data (to be described later) output from the object extraction result memory 214, the object number assigned to the click data, and the object image data corresponding to the object number Send to the mobile object connection processing section 210.

此外,相应于静止区域和移动区域确定结果和连续点击确定结果,当点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是一个静止点击和一个连续点击(当前点击时间与前一点击时间之间的时间差等于或大于预定阈值)时,处理确定部分205控制选择开关206,使点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据发送给对象号分配部分209。此外,处理确定部分205控制选择开关207,使从图像存储器201输出的图像数据发送给静止对象连接处理部分211。此时,选择开关208控制选择开关208。使对象提取结果处理器214输出的前一点击数据、对象号、和对象图像数据不发送给静止对象连接处理部分211(在此情况下,例如,选择开关208打开)。In addition, corresponding to the static area and the moving area determination result and the continuous click determination result, when the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is a static click and a continuous click (the time difference between the current click time and the previous click time is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold), the process determination section 205 controls the selection switch 206 so that the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is sent to the object number allocation section 209 . Furthermore, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 207 so that the image data output from the image memory 201 is sent to the stationary object connection processing section 211 . At this time, the selection switch 208 controls the selection switch 208 . The previous click data, object number, and object image data output by the object extraction result processor 214 are caused not to be sent to the stationary object connection processing section 211 (in this case, for example, the selection switch 208 is turned on).

此外,相应于静止区域和移动区域确定结果和连续点击确定结果,当点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是一个移动点击和一个非连续点击(当前点击时间与前一点击时间之间的时间差等于或大于预定阈值)时,处理确定部分205控制选择开关206,使点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据不发送给对象号分配部分209。此外,处理确定部分205控制选择开关207,使图像存储器201输出的图像数据发送给移动对象连接处理部分210。此时,处理确定部分205控制选择开关208,使得对象提取结果存储器214输出的前一点击数据、对象号、和对象图像数据不发送给移动对象连接处理部分210(例如,打开选择开关208)。In addition, corresponding to the static area and the moving area determination result and the continuous click determination result, when the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is a moving click and a discontinuous click (the time difference between the current click time and the previous click time is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold), the processing determining part 205 controls the selection switch 206 so that the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is not sent to the object number assigning part 209. Furthermore, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 207 so that the image data output from the image memory 201 is sent to the mobile object connection processing section 210 . At this time, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch 208 so that the previous click data, object number, and object image data output by the object extraction result memory 214 are not sent to the moving object connection processing section 210 (for example, the selection switch 208 is turned on).

对象号分配部分209把一个新对象号分配给由静止对象连接处理部分211和移动对象连接处理部分210按一个连接处理进行处理的作为一个非连续点击而不是连续点击的点击数据(下面将进行说明),并把该对象号和点击数据发送给对象号存储器212。The object number assignment section 209 assigns a new object number to the click data (will be described below) as a discontinuous click rather than a continuous click that is processed by the stationary object connection processing section 211 and the moving object connection processing section 210 by one connection processing ), and send the object number and the click data to the object number memory 212.

当处理确定部分205确定点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是移动点击和连续点击时,移动对象连接处理部分210确定前一点击数据是否是移动点击,当前点击位置附近的图像特征是否被包含在具有分配给前一点击数据的对象号的移动对象图像区域的特征内,或它们(当前点击数据和前一点击数据)是否相同。当确定结果是肯定的时,移动对象连接处理部分210确定当前点击是对相同对象图像的点击。因而,移动对象连接处理部分210执行一个连接处理,将与前一点击数据相同的对象号分配给当前点击数据和把该对象号和点击数据发送给对象号存储器212。When the processing determination part 205 determines that the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is a moving click and a continuous click, the moving object connection processing part 210 determines whether the previous click data is a moving click, whether the image feature near the current click position is included in Within the feature of the moving object image area with the object number assigned to the previous click data, or whether they (the current click data and the previous click data) are the same. When the determination result is positive, the mobile object connection processing section 210 determines that the current click is a click on the same object image. Thus, the moving object connection processing section 210 performs a connection process of assigning the same object number as that of the previous click data to the current click data and sending the object number and the click data to the object number memory 212 .

当处理确定部分205的确定结果表明点击数据存储器202输出的当前点击数据是静止点击和连续点击时,静止对象连接处理部分211确定前一点击是否是静止点击,以及当前点击位置是否被包含在具有分配给前一点击数据的对象号的静止对象图像的区域中,或当前点击位置是否接近该区域。当静止对象连接处理部分211的确定结果是肯定的时,静止对象连接处理部分211确定当前点击是用于与前一点击相同的对象的点击。因而,静止对象连接处理部分211执行一个静止对象连接处理,将与前一点击数据相同的对象号分配给当前点击数据并把该对象号和点击数据发送给对象号存储器212。When the determined result of the processing determination section 205 shows that the current click data output by the click data memory 202 is a still click and a continuous click, the still object connection processing section 211 determines whether the previous click is a still click, and whether the current click position is included in the In the area of the still object image assigned to the object number of the previous click data, or whether the current click position is close to the area. When the determination result of the stationary object connection processing section 211 is affirmative, the stationary object connection processing section 211 determines that the current click is a click for the same object as the previous click. Thus, the stationary object connection processing section 211 performs a stationary object connection process of assigning the same object number as the previous click data to the current click data and sending the object number and the click data to the object number memory 212 .

对象号存储器212存储已经由对象号分配部分209、移动对象连接处理部分210和静止对象连接处理部分211分配了对象号的多个过去帧的点击数据,并把该存储的点击数据和对象号发送给对象图像提取部分213。The object number memory 212 stores click data of a plurality of past frames to which object numbers have been allocated by the object number assignment section 209, the moving object connection processing section 210, and the stationary object connection processing section 211, and transmits the stored click data and the object number to the object image extraction section 213.

对象图像提取部分213相应于已从对象号存储器212供应的并且已经分配了对象号多个过去帧的点击数据,从图像存储器201供给的图像数据中提取静止对象图像、移动对象图像、背景图像等,并且把提取的结果供应给对象提取结果存储器214。The object image extraction section 213 extracts a still object image, a moving object image, a background image, etc. from the image data supplied from the image memory 201 corresponding to the click data which has been supplied from the object number memory 212 and to which an object number has been assigned a plurality of past frames. , and supply the extracted result to the object extraction result memory 214.

换句话说,对象图像提取部分213相应于从对象提取部分213供应的并且已经分配了对象号多个过去帧的点击数据,从作为静止点击的具有高点击数据密度的点击数据的图像部分中获得一个占优的对象号。对象图像提取部分213相应于用占优对象号分配的点击数据的分配形成一个对象的形状,并从该图像数据中提取按一个对象图像构形对象的一个图像。In other words, the object image extraction section 213 obtains from the image portion of click data having a high click data density as a still click corresponding to the click data supplied from the object extraction section 213 and to which an object number has been assigned a plurality of past frames. A predominate object number. The object image extracting section 213 forms the shape of an object corresponding to the assignment of the click data assigned with the dominant object number, and extracts an image configuring the object as an object image from the image data.

此外,对象图像提取部分213对于在被确定为移动点击的点击数据中分配了相同对象号的点击位置附近的帧的图像,执行一个图案匹配操作,并相应于该匹配结果为该图像执行移动补偿。然而,对象图像提取部分213从被确定为相似图像区域的一个图像数据中获得具有高点击密度的一个图像区域(即,通过移动补偿调整的图像区域)的占优对象号。对象图像提取部分213相应于分配了占优对象号的点击数据的分配构成一个图像的形状,并从该图像区域中提取以一个对象图像构形的一个图像。Further, the object image extracting section 213 performs a pattern matching operation on an image of a frame near the click position to which the same object number is assigned in the click data determined to be a movement click, and performs motion compensation for the image corresponding to the matching result. . However, the object image extraction section 213 obtains the dominant object number of an image area having a high click density (ie, an image area adjusted by motion compensation) from an image data determined as a similar image area. The object image extracting section 213 forms the shape of an image corresponding to the assignment of the click data to which the dominant object number is assigned, and extracts an image configured with an object image from the image area.

此后,对象图像提取部分213把具有低静止点击密度和低移动点击密度的一个图像部分指定为一个背景图像。Thereafter, the object image extracting section 213 designates an image portion having a low still click density and a low moving click density as a background image.

对象提取结果存储器214存储由对象图像提取部分213提取的对象图像数据,以及点击数据、对象号等。必要时,对象提取结果存储器214向图29所示的背景图像提取部分1013、附加信息计算部分15和发送处理部分1016供应该对象图像数据。The object extraction result memory 214 stores object image data extracted by the object image extraction section 213, as well as click data, object numbers, and the like. The object extraction result memory 214 supplies the object image data to the background image extraction section 1013, the additional information calculation section 15, and the transmission processing section 1016 shown in FIG. 29 as necessary.

下面,结合图38所示的流程图说明相应于接收设备2发送的点击数据来提取接收设备2的用户从正在拍摄的一个图像中考虑的一个对象图像(感兴趣的对象区域)的处理。该处理由图37所示的对象提取设备1014执行。Next, a process of extracting an object image (object region of interest) considered by the user of the receiving device 2 from an image being photographed corresponding to the click data transmitted by the receiving device 2 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 38 . This processing is performed by the object extraction device 1014 shown in FIG. 37 .

首先,在步骤S131,图像存储器201存储图像输入部分11输入的一帧的图像数据(输入无论何时发送的帧图像数据)。图像存储器201存储在步骤S133上执行静止区域和移动区域确定处理所需的至少几个帧的图像数据。First, in step S131, the image memory 201 stores image data of one frame input by the image input section 11 (frame image data input whenever transmitted). The image memory 201 stores image data of at least several frames required to perform still area and moving area determination processing at step S133.

在步骤S131上,当接收设备2经发送路径3发送点击数据时,点击数据存储器202存储该点击数据。点击数据存储器202存储在步骤S133上执行的连续点击确定处理(下面将进行说明)至少一个预定时间周期(例如,长达500至700毫秒)所需的的点击数据。At step S131, when the receiving device 2 transmits click data via the transmission path 3, the click data memory 202 stores the click data. The click data memory 202 stores click data necessary for continuous click determination processing (to be described below) performed at step S133 for at least a predetermined period of time (for example, up to 500 to 700 milliseconds).

此后,流程前进到步骤S132,在步骤S132,对象提取部分1014确定是否存储了接收设备2已发送的并且未被处理的点击数据。当步骤S132上的确定结果表明点击数据存储器202没有存储未被处理的点击数据时,流程返回到步骤S131。在步骤S131上,对象提取部分1014等待输入图像数据和点击数据。相反,当步骤S132上的确定结果表明点击数据存储器202存储了未被处理的点击数据时,流程前进到步骤S133。在步骤S133上,对象提取部分1014把未被处理的最旧的点击数据指定为当前点击数据。静止区域和移动区域确定部分203、连续点击确定部分204和处理确定部分205为该当前点击数据执行静止区域和移动区域确定处理和连续点击确定处理。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S132, where the object extraction section 1014 determines whether or not click data that has been transmitted by the receiving device 2 and has not been processed is stored. When the determined result at step S132 indicates that the click data memory 202 does not store unprocessed click data, the flow returns to step S131. At step S131, the object extraction section 1014 waits for image data and click data to be input. In contrast, when the determined result at step S132 indicates that the click data memory 202 stores unprocessed click data, the flow proceeds to step S133. At step S133, the object extracting section 1014 designates the oldest click data that has not been processed as the current click data. The still area and moving area determination section 203, the continuous click determination section 204, and the processing determination section 205 execute still area and moving area determination processing and continuous click determination processing for this current click data.

换句话说,在步骤S133上,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203使用接收设备2发送的当前点击数据中含有的点击位置信息(图像坐标值)执行静止区域和移动区域的确定处理,以确定作为一个点击位置周围的局部小块的一个图像区域是一个移动区域还是一个静止区域。In other words, at step S133, the still area and moving area determining section 203 uses the click position information (image coordinate value) contained in the current click data transmitted from the receiving device 2 to perform the determination processing of the still area and the moving area to determine the Whether an image area of a local patch around a click location is a moving area or a static area.

下面,更实际地说明由静止区域和移动区域确定部分203执行的图38所示的在步骤S133上进行的静止区域和移动区域确定处理。如图39所示的流程图所示,在步骤S141上,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203从图像存储器201和点击数据存储器202分别读出几个帧的图像数据和点击数据。处理一个彩色图像时,如图40(A)所示,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203读出用于R(红)、G(绿)、B(蓝)的几个帧的图像数据。此外,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203从图像数据存储器201和点击数据存储器202中分别读出包含对应于当前点击数据的一个帧的几个过去帧的图像数据和对应于为这几个帧所执行的点击的点击数据。Next, the still area and moving area determination processing at step S133 shown in FIG. 38 performed by the still area and moving area determining section 203 will be described more practically. As shown in the flowchart shown in FIG. 39, at step S141, the still area and moving area determination section 203 reads out several frames of image data and click data from the image memory 201 and click data memory 202, respectively. When processing a color image, as shown in FIG. 40(A), the still area and moving area determining section 203 reads out image data for several frames of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In addition, the still area and moving area determining section 203 reads out image data of several past frames including one frame corresponding to the current click data and images corresponding to the frames corresponding to the click data from the image data memory 201 and the click data memory 202, respectively. Click data for clicks performed.

此后,在步骤S142上,对于当前点击数据的点击位置周围的水平方向和垂直方向上的由16×16象素组成的一个局部小块,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203计算当前帧的一个图像区域与超前该当前帧几个帧的过去帧(该过去帧被称之为过去帧)之间的差值。处理一个彩色图像时,在步骤S142上,如图40(B)和40(A)所示,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203获得用于R、G和B每一个的由16×16象素组成的一个图像的帧之间的差值并获得用于R、G和B每一个的差值绝对值的平均值。Thereafter, in step S142, for a local small block consisting of 16×16 pixels in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction around the click position of the current click data, the still area and the moving area determining section 203 calculate an image of the current frame The difference between the region and the past frame that is several frames ahead of the current frame (the past frame is called the past frame). When a color image is processed, at step S142, as shown in FIGS. 40(B) and 40(A), the still area and moving area determination section 203 obtains a 16×16 pixel area for each of R, G, and B Compose the difference between frames of an image and obtain the average of the absolute values of the differences for each of R, G and B.

此后,在步骤S143上,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定在步骤S142上计算的帧间差值是否等于或小于一个确定的阈值。此后,流程前进到步骤S144。当帧间差值等于或小于预定阈值时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定包含当前点击数据的点击位置的一个小块(该小块可以被称之为当前块)是一个静止区域。相反,当帧间差值大于预定阈值时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定该当前块是一个移动区域。此外,当静止区域和移动区域确定部分203的确定结果表明当前块是一个静止区域时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203把对应于当前块的图像区域的点击数据指定为一个静止点击。相反,当静止区域和移动区域确定部分203的确定结果表明当前块是一个移动区域时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203把相当于当前块的图像区域点击数据指定为一个移动点击。静止区域和移动区域确定部分203输出作为静止区域和移动区域确定结果的该确定结果。Thereafter, at step S143, the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines whether or not the inter-frame difference calculated at step S142 is equal to or smaller than a determined threshold. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S144. When the difference between frames is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold, the still area and moving area determining section 203 determines that a small block (the small block may be called a current block) containing the click position of the current click data is a still area. On the contrary, when the difference between frames is greater than a predetermined threshold, the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines that the current block is a moving area. Furthermore, when the determination result of the still area and moving area determining section 203 indicates that the current block is a still area, the still area and moving area determining section 203 designates the click data corresponding to the image area of the current block as a still click. On the contrary, when the determination result of the still area and moving area determining section 203 indicates that the current block is a moving area, the still area and moving area determining section 203 designates the image area click data corresponding to the current block as a moving click. The still area and moving area determination section 203 outputs the determination result as the still area and moving area determination result.

在处理一个彩色图像的情况下,在步骤S144,如图40(D)所示,当用于R、G和B每一个的16×16象素的每个块的帧间差值的绝对值的平均值小于或等于一个预定阈值(例如,“10”)时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203把预定标志调整到例如“0”。相反,当该平均值大于预定阈值时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203把预定标志调整到例如“1”。在步骤S144上,如图40(E)所示,当用于16×16象素的当前块的R、G和B的所有标志都为“0”时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定当前块是一个静止区域,并把对应于当前块的图像区域的点击数据指定为静止点击。相反,当标志之一是“1”时,静止区域和移动区域确定部分203确定当前块是一个移动区域并且把与当前块的图像区域相对应的点击数据指定为一个移动点击。静止区域和移动区域确定部分203输出作为静止区域和移动区域确定结果的静止点击或移动点击的信息。In the case of processing a color image, in step S144, as shown in FIG. 40(D), when the absolute value of the interframe difference for each block of 16×16 pixels for each of R, G, and B When the average value of is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold (for example, "10"), the still area and moving area determination section 203 adjusts the predetermined flag to, for example, "0". On the contrary, when the average value is larger than the predetermined threshold, the still area and moving area determination section 203 adjusts the predetermined flag to, for example, "1". At step S144, as shown in FIG. 40(E), when all the flags of R, G, and B for the current block of 16×16 pixels are “0”, the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines The current block is a still area, and the click data corresponding to the image area of the current block is designated as a still click. On the contrary, when one of the flags is "1", the still area and moving area determination section 203 determines that the current block is a moving area and specifies the click data corresponding to the image area of the current block as a moving click. The still area and moving area determination section 203 outputs information of a still click or a moving click as a result of the still area and moving area determination.

返回到图38,在步骤S133上,连续点击确定部分204连续点击确定处理,确定接收设备2的用户所执行的点击操作是否是与接收设备2发送的点击数据中包含的点击时间相对应的连续点击操作。Returning to FIG. 38 , at step S133, the continuous click determination section 204 performs continuous click determination processing to determine whether the click operation performed by the user of the receiving device 2 is a continuous click operation corresponding to the click time included in the click data sent by the receiving device 2. Click Actions.

下面说明图38所示的在步骤S133上执行的连续点击确定部分204的处理。根据图41所示的流程图,在步骤S151上,点击数据存储器202读出在点击数据存储器202中存储的点击数据。Next, the processing of the continuous click determination section 204 performed at step S133 shown in FIG. 38 will be described. According to the flowchart shown in FIG. 41, at step S151, the click data memory 202 reads out the click data stored in the click data memory 202.

此后,在步骤S152上,连续点击确定部分204计算从接收设备2发送的当前点击数据的点击时间与前一点击数据的点击时间(在前时间)之间的时间差(点击间隔)。Thereafter, at step S152, the continuous click determination section 204 calculates the time difference (click interval) between the click time of the current click data sent from the receiving device 2 and the click time (previous time) of the previous click data.

然后,在步骤S153上,连续点击确定部分204确定该时间差是否等于或小于一个预定阈值。当步骤S153上的确定结果表明该时间差等于或小于预定阈值时,连续点击确定部分204确定当前点击数据是连续点击。相反,当步骤S153上的确定结果表明该时间差大于预定阈值时,连续点击确定部分204确定当前点击数据不是连续点击。此后,流程前进到步骤S154。在步骤S154上,连续点击确定部分204输出代表作为连续点击确定结果的连续点击或非连续点击的信息。Then, at step S153, the continuous click determination section 204 determines whether the time difference is equal to or smaller than a predetermined threshold. When the determined result at step S153 indicates that the time difference is equal to or smaller than the predetermined threshold, the continuous click determination section 204 determines that the current click data is a continuous click. On the contrary, when the determined result at step S153 indicates that the time difference is greater than the predetermined threshold, the continuous click determination section 204 determines that the current click data is not a continuous click. Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S154. At step S154, the continuous click determination section 204 outputs information representing continuous clicks or discontinuous clicks as a result of the continuous click determination.

换句话说,当步骤S153上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是连续点击时,接收设备2的用户往往是对一个对象图像连续执行点击操作。这是因为,当接收设备2的用户请求发送设备1发送具有高空间分辨率的对象图像数据(兴趣对象区域中的数据)时,他或她往往连续地点击用户想要改善其空间分辨率的一个对象图像部分(兴趣对象区域)。因而,当连续点击确定部分204的确定结果表明当前点击操作是连续点击操作时,连续点击确定部分204把当前点击数据指定为连续点击。相反,当连续点击确定部分204的确定结果表明当前点击操作不是连续点击操作(即,当前点击的点击时间与前一点击的点击时间之间的时间差等于或大于预定阈值)时,连续点击确定部分204把当前点击数据指定为一个非连续点击。连续点击确定部分204输出连续点击确定结果。In other words, when the determined result at step S153 indicates that the current click data is continuous clicks, the user of the receiving device 2 often performs click operations on one object image continuously. This is because, when the user of the receiving device 2 requests the transmitting device 1 to transmit object image data (data in the object region of interest) with a high spatial resolution, he or she tends to continuously click on the object whose spatial resolution the user wants to improve. An object image part (object region of interest). Thus, when the determination result of the continuous click determination section 204 indicates that the current click operation is a continuous click operation, the continuous click determination section 204 designates the current click data as a continuous click. On the contrary, when the determination result of the continuous click determination part 204 shows that the current click operation is not a continuous click operation (that is, the time difference between the click time of the current click and the click time of the previous click is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold), the continuous click determination part 204 designates the current click data as a non-sequential click. The continuous click determination section 204 outputs a continuous click determination result.

返回到图38,在步骤S133上,当静止区域和移动区域确定部分203和连续点击确定部分204的确定结果表明当前点击数据是静止点击和连续点击时,处理确定部分205按上述方式控制选择开关206、选择开关207和选择开关208。因而,在步骤S135上,静止对象连接处理部分211执行一个静止图像连接处理。当确定结果表明当前点击数据是一个移动点击和一个连续点击时,处理确定部分205按上述方式控制选择开关206、选择开关207和选择开关208。因而,在步骤S136上,移动对象连接处理部分210执行一个移动对象连接处理。当确定结果表明当前点击数据是非连续点击时,处理确定部分205按上述方式控制选择开关206、选择开关207和选择开关208。在步骤S136上,移动对象连接处理部分210执行移动对象连接处理。当确定结果表明当前点击数据是一个非连续点击时,处理确定部分205按上述方式控制选择开关206。因而,在步骤S134上,对象号分配部分209执行新对象号分配处理。Returning to Fig. 38, on step S133, when the determined result of static area and moving area determination section 203 and continuous click determination section 204 shows that the current click data is a static click and continuous click, the processing determination section 205 controls the selection switch in the above-mentioned manner 206 , selection switch 207 and selection switch 208 . Thus, at step S135, the still object connection processing section 211 executes a still image connection process. When the determination result indicates that the current click data is a moving click and a continuous click, the process determining section 205 controls the selection switch 206, the selection switch 207, and the selection switch 208 in the above-described manner. Thus, at step S136, the mobile object connection processing section 210 executes a mobile object connection process. When the determination result indicates that the current click data is a discontinuous click, the process determination section 205 controls the selection switch 206, the selection switch 207, and the selection switch 208 in the above-described manner. At step S136, the mobile object connection processing section 210 executes mobile object connection processing. When the determined result indicates that the current click data is a discontinuous click, the process determination section 205 controls the selection switch 206 in the above-described manner. Thus, at step S134, the object number assigning section 209 executes new object number assigning processing.

换句话说,当步骤S133上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是非连续点击时,流程返回到步骤S134。在步骤S134上,对象号分配部分209把一个新对象号分配给当前点击数据。此后,流程返回到步骤S131。In other words, when the determined result at step S133 indicates that the current click data is a discontinuous click, the flow returns to step S134. At step S134, the object number assignment section 209 assigns a new object number to the current click data. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S131.

实际上,如图42(A)所示,当分配给由实线X代表的前一点击数据CL1的一个对象号是例如“0”时,如果由图42(A)中的虚线X标记代表的当前点击数据CL2(即,未指定一个对象号的点击数据)被确定为一个非连续点击时,对象号分配部分209把一个新对象号分配给由图42(B)中的实线X标记代表的当前点击数据CL2(在该实例中,新对象号是“1”)。Actually, as shown in FIG. 42(A), when an object number assigned to the previous click data CL1 represented by the solid line X is, for example, "0", if represented by the dotted line X mark in Fig. 42(A), When the current click data CL2 (that is, the click data that does not specify an object number) is determined to be a discontinuous click, the object number assigning section 209 assigns a new object number to the object marked by the solid line X in FIG. 42(B). represents the current click data CL2 (in this example, the new object number is "1").

相反,当步骤S133上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是连续点击和静止点击时,如果前一点击是静止点击,以及当前点击位置被包含在与分配给前一点击数据的对象号相对应的一个图像区域中,或者当前点击位置接近该图像区域,则静止对象连接处理部分211判定当前点击是用于与前一点击相同的对象图像的一个点击。因而,在步骤S134上,静止对象连接处理部分211执行静止图像连接处理,用于为当前点击数据分配与前一点击数据相同的对象号。On the contrary, when the determined result at step S133 indicates that the current click data is a continuous click and a still click, if the previous click is a still click, and the current click position is contained in a corresponding object number assigned to the previous click data. In the image area, or the current click position is close to the image area, the stationary object connection processing section 211 judges that the current click is a click for the same object image as the previous click. Thus, at step S134, the still object connection processing section 211 executes still image connection processing for assigning the same object number as that of the previous click data to the current click data.

换句话说,如图43所示的流程图所示,在步骤S161上,静止对象连接处理部分211确定前一点击数据是否是连续点击和静止点击。当步骤S161上的确定结果表明前一点击数据是连续点击和静止点击时,流程前进到步骤S162。相反,当步骤S161上的确定结果表明前一点击不是连续点击和静止点击时,流程前进到步骤S164。In other words, as shown in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43, at step S161, the still object connection processing section 211 determines whether the previous click data is a continuous click and a still click. When the determined result at step S161 indicates that the previous click data are continuous clicks and still clicks, the flow proceeds to step S162. In contrast, when the determined result at step S161 indicates that the previous click was not a continuous click and a still click, the flow advances to step S164.

当步骤S161上的确定结果表明前一点击数据不是连续的和静止的点击时,在步骤S164上,静止对象连接处理部分211按照与结合图42(A)和(B)所述的相同的方式把一个新对象号分配给当前点击数据。此后,流程前进到图38所示的步骤S137。When the determined result at step S161 shows that the previous click data is not a continuous and still click, at step S164, the still object connection processing section 211 follows the same manner as described in connection with FIGS. 42(A) and (B). Assign a new object number to the current click data. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S137 shown in FIG. 38 .

相反,当步骤S161上的确定结果表明前一点击数据是连续点击和静止点击时,流程返回到步骤S162。在步骤S162上,静止对象连接处理部分211获得当前点击位置与对应于分配给前一点击数据的对象号的图像区域之间的空间距离。当当前点击位置被包含在与分配给前一点击数据的对象号相对应的图像区域中时,或当前点击位置接近该图像区域时,静止对象连接处理部分211确定当前点击数据是与前一点击相同的对象图像的点击数据。相反,当当前点击位置未包含在与分配给前一点击数据的对象号相对应的图像区域中时,以及当前点击位置远离该图像区域时,静止对象连接处理部分211确定当前点击数据是与前一点击不同的对象图像的点击数据。当步骤S162上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是与前一点击相同的对象图像的点击数据时,流程前进到步骤S163。相反,当步骤S162上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是不同于前一点击的对象图像的点击数据时,流程返回到步骤S164。On the contrary, when the determined result at step S161 indicates that the previous click data is a continuous click and a still click, the flow returns to step S162. At step S162, the stationary object connection processing section 211 obtains the spatial distance between the current click position and the image area corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click data. When the current click position is included in the image area corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click data, or when the current click position is close to the image area, the still object connection processing section 211 determines that the current click data is related to the previous click data. Click data of the same object image. On the contrary, when the current click position is not included in the image area corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click data, and the current click position is far from the image area, the still object connection processing section 211 determines that the current click data is the same as the previous click data. A click data of a different object image is clicked. When the determined result at step S162 indicates that the current click data is that of the same object image as the previous click, the flow proceeds to step S163. In contrast, when the determined result at step S162 indicates that the current click data is click data different from the object image of the previous click, the flow returns to step S164.

当步骤S162上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是不同于前一点击的对象图像的点击数据时,流程返回到步骤S164。在步骤S164,静止对象连接处理部分211把一个新对象号分配给当前点击数据。此后,流程前进到图38所示的步骤S137。When the determined result at step S162 indicates that the current click data is click data different from the object image of the previous click, the flow returns to step S164. In step S164, the stationary object connection processing section 211 assigns a new object number to the current click data. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S137 shown in FIG. 38 .

相反,当步骤S162上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是与前一点击相同的对象图像的点击数据时,在步骤S163上,静止对象连接处理部分211执行静止对象连接处理,用于把和前一点击数据相同的对象号分配给当前点击数据。On the contrary, when the determined result at step S162 shows that the current click data is the click data of the same object image as the previous click, at step S163, the still object connection processing section 211 executes still object connection processing for combining the same object image with the previous click. The same object number as the click data is assigned to the current click data.

实际上,如图42(C)所示,当分配给由实线X标记所表示的前一点击数据CL1的一个对象号是“0”时,如果由图42(C)所示的虚线X标记所表示的当前点击标记CL2(即,未给当前点击数据指定一个对象号)被确定为连续点击和静止点击,前一点是静止点击以及当前点击位置被包含在与分配给前一点击数据的一个对象号相对应的图像区域中,或者当前点击位置接近该图像区域,则静止对象连接处理部分211把与前一点击数据相同的对象号(在该实例中为“1”)分配给由图42(D)所示的实线X标记表示的当前点击数据CL2。Actually, as shown in FIG. 42(C), when an object number assigned to the previous click data CL1 represented by the solid line X mark is "0", if the dotted line X shown in FIG. 42(C) The current click mark CL2 indicated by the mark (that is, an object number is not assigned to the current click data) is determined as a continuous click and a still click, the previous point is a still click and the current click position is included in the In the image area corresponding to an object number, or the current click position is close to the image area, the still object connection processing section 211 assigns the same object number ("1" in this example) as the previous click data to the image area identified by the image. The current click data CL2 indicated by the solid line X mark shown in 42(D).

静止对象连接处理部分211把与前一点击数据相同的对象号分配给当前点击数据后。流程前进到图38所示的步骤S137。The stationary object connection processing section 211 assigns the same object number as that of the previous click data to the current click data. The flow advances to step S137 shown in FIG. 38 .

当步骤S133上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是连续点击和移动点击、前一点击是移动点击、以及当前点击位置附近的图像特征被包含在与分配给前一点击的对象号相对应的图像区域(16×16象素)的特征中、或前者接近于后者时,移动对象连接处理部分210确定该点击是与前一点击相同的对象图像的点击。在步骤S136上,移动对象连接处理部分210执行移动对象连接处理,用于把和前一点击数据相同的对象号分配给当前点击数据。When the determination result on the step S133 shows that the current click data is a continuous click and a moving click, the previous click is a moving click, and image features near the current click position are included in the image area corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click Among the features of (16×16 pixels), or when the former is close to the latter, the moving object connection processing section 210 determines that the click is a click of the same object image as the previous click. At step S136, the moving object connection processing section 210 executes moving object connection processing for assigning the same object number as that of the previous click data to the current click data.

换句话说,当步骤S133上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是连续点击和移动点击时,则如图44所示,在步骤S171上,移动对象连接处理部分210确定前一点击数据是否是连续点击和移动点击。当步骤S171上的确定结果表明前一点击数据是连续点击和移动点击时,流程前进到步骤S172。相反,当步骤S171上的确定结果不是连续点击和移动点击时,流程前进到步骤S174。In other words, when the determined result at step S133 indicates that the current click data is a continuous click and a moving click, then as shown in FIG. and mobile clicks. When the determined result at step S171 indicates that the previous click data is a continuous click and a moving click, the flow proceeds to step S172. In contrast, when the determined result at step S171 is not the continuous click and the moving click, the flow proceeds to step S174.

当步骤S171上的确定结果表明前一点击数据不是连续点击和移动点击时,流程前进到步骤S174。在步骤S174,移动对象连接处理部分210按照结合图41(A)和(B)所述的相同方式把一个新对象号分配给当前点击数据。此后,流程前进到图38所示的步骤S137。When the determined result at step S171 indicates that the previous click data is not a continuous click and a moving click, the flow proceeds to step S174. In step S174, the mobile object connection processing section 210 assigns a new object number to the current click data in the same manner as described in connection with Figs. 41(A) and (B). Thereafter, the flow advances to step S137 shown in FIG. 38 .

当步骤S171上的确定结果表明前一点击数据是连续点击和移动点击时,流程前进到步骤S172。在步骤S172,移动对象连接处理部分210获得当前点击位置附近的图像数据(16×16象素)的特征,和与分配给前一点击的对象号相对应的图像区域的特征。当当前点击位置附近的图像区域的特征包含在与分配给前一点击数据的对象号相对应的图像区域的特征中,并且前者接近后者时,接收处理部分210确定该点击是与前一点击相同的对象图像的点击。相反,当与分配给前一点击数据的对象号相对应的图像区域的特征中不包含当前点击位置附近的图像区域的特征时,或前者远离后者时,接收处理部分210确定当前点击数据是不同于前一点击的对象图像的点击数据。在此情况下,图像区域的特征是例如一个点击位置附近的局部区域(16×16象素)的颜色(平均颜色,典型颜色,或类似物)、条形图或图案。当相同对象号被分配给多个移动点击时,则意味着在这些点击数据中跟踪一个对象。当步骤S172上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是用于与前一点击相同的对象图像的点击数据时,流程前进到步骤S173。相反,当步骤S172上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是用于不同于前一点击的对象的点击数据时,流程前进到步骤S174。When the determined result at step S171 indicates that the previous click data is a continuous click and a moving click, the flow proceeds to step S172. In step S172, the moving object connection processing section 210 obtains features of the image data (16*16 pixels) around the current click position, and features of the image area corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click. When the feature of the image area near the current click position is included in the feature of the image area corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click data, and the former is close to the latter, the reception processing section 210 determines that the click is related to the previous click. Clicks on the same object image. On the contrary, when the characteristics of the image region near the current click position are not included in the characteristics of the image region corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click data, or the former is far away from the latter, the reception processing section 210 determines that the current click data is Click data for an object image that is different from the previous click. In this case, the feature of the image area is, for example, a color (average color, typical color, or the like), a bar graph, or a pattern of a local area (16*16 pixels) near a clicked position. When the same object number is assigned to multiple movement hits, it means that one object is tracked in these hit data. When the determined result at step S172 indicates that the current click data is click data for the same object image as the previous click, the flow proceeds to step S173. In contrast, when the determined result at step S172 indicates that the current click data is click data for an object different from the previous click, the flow proceeds to step S174.

当步骤S172上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是用于不同于前一点击的对象图像的点击数据时,流程前进到步骤S174。在步骤S174上,移动对象连接部分210按上述方式把一个新对象号分配给当前点击数据。此后,流程前进到图38所示的步骤S137。When the determined result at step S172 indicates that the current click data is click data for an object image different from the previous click, the flow proceeds to step S174. At step S174, the moving object connection section 210 assigns a new object number to the current click data in the above-mentioned manner. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S137 shown in FIG. 38 .

当步骤S172上的确定结果表明当前点击数据是用于与前一点击相同的对象图像的点击数据时,流程前进到步骤S173。在步骤S173,移动对象连接处理部分210把与前一点击数据相同的对象号分配给当前点击数据。When the determined result at step S172 indicates that the current click data is click data for the same object image as the previous click, the flow proceeds to step S173. In step S173, the moving object connection processing section 210 assigns the same object number as that of the previous click data to the current click data.

实际上,当分配给由图42(E)所示的实线X表示的前一点击数据CL1的一个对象号是例如“0”时,如果由图42(E)所示的虚线X表示的当前点击数据CL2被确定为连续点击和移动点击,以及当前点击位置附近的图像的特征被包含在与分配给前一点击的对象号相对应的对象图像的特征中,或者前者接近于后者,则移动对象连接处理部分210把与前一点击数据相同的对象号(在该实例中为“0”)分配给由图42(F)所示的实线X标记表示的当前点击数据CL2。Actually, when an object number assigned to the previous click data CL1 represented by the solid line X shown in FIG. 42(E) is, for example, "0", if the The current click data CL2 is determined as a continuous click and a moving click, and the feature of the image near the current click position is included in the feature of the object image corresponding to the object number assigned to the previous click, or the former is close to the latter, Then the moving object connection processing section 210 assigns the same object number ("0" in this example) as the previous click data to the current click data CL2 indicated by the solid line X mark shown in FIG. 42(F).

在步骤S173,在移动对象连接处理部分210把与前一点击相同的对象号分配给当前点击数据后,流程前进到步骤S137。In step S173, after the moving object connection processing section 210 assigns the same object number as the previous click to the current click data, the flow proceeds to step S137.

当流程从图38所示的步骤S135前进到步骤S137时,对象图像提取部分213从与分配了对象号并存储在对象号存储器212中的过去几个帧的点击数据相对应的输入数据中和存储在图像存储器20中的过去几个帧的图像数据中提取静止对象图像、移动对象图像和其他的背景图像。换句话说,似乎是静止对象图像被包含在具有高静止点击数据密度的图像部分中。此时,对象图像提取部分213获得与分配了对象号的过去几个帧相对应的静止点击数据密度,获得具有高静止点击密度的图像部分的占优对象号,形成与分配了占优对象号的点击数据的分布相对应的对象的形状,和从图像数据中提取按静止对象图像构形对象的一个图像。When the flow advances to step S137 from step S135 shown in FIG. Still object images, moving object images, and other background images are extracted from the image data of past several frames stored in the image memory 20 . In other words, it seems that a still object image is contained in an image portion having a high still click data density. At this time, the object image extracting section 213 obtains the still click data density corresponding to the past several frames to which the object number is assigned, obtains the dominant object number of the image portion having a high still click density, forms and assigns the dominant object number A distribution of the click data corresponds to the shape of the object, and an image of the object configured according to the still object image is extracted from the image data.

当流程从步骤S136前进到步骤S137时,对象图像提取部分213为分配了相同的对象号的移动点击数据的点击位置附近的帧的图像执行图案匹配操作,对应于该匹配结果执行图像的移动补偿,获得具有高点击密度的图案匹配图像区域的占优对象号,相应于分配了占优对象号的点击数据的分布形成一个对象的形状,并从图像数据中提取按移动对象图像构形对象的一个图像。When the flow advances from step S136 to step S137, the object image extraction section 213 performs a pattern matching operation for images of frames near the click position of the movement click data to which the same object number is assigned, and performs movement compensation of the image corresponding to the matching result. , obtain the dominant object number of the pattern-matched image region with high click density, form an object shape corresponding to the distribution of click data assigned the dominant object number, and extract from the image data the shape of the object by moving the object image an image.

在步骤S137上,对象图像提取部分213把具有低静止点击密度或低移动点击数据的一个图像部分处理为当前背景图像。换句话说,对象图像提取部分213把从图像数据中提取的除静止对象图像和移动对象图像之外的一个图像部分处理为一个背景图像。At step S137, the object image extracting section 213 processes an image portion having low still click density or low moving click data as the current background image. In other words, the object image extracting section 213 processes an image portion extracted from image data other than the still object image and the moving object image as a background image.

下面结合图45所示的流程图详细说明步骤S137上的处理。首先,在步骤S181上,对象图像提取部分213捕获几个过去帧分配对象号的点击数据和与其对应的图像数据。此后在步骤S182上,对象图像提取部分213把点击数据归类为静止点击和移动点击。当流程从图38所示的步骤S135前进到步骤S137时,流程从图45所示的步骤S182前进到步骤S184。相反,当流程从图38所示的步骤S136前进到步骤S137时,流程从图45所示的步骤S182前进到步骤S184。The processing at step S137 will be described in detail below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 45 . First, at step S181, the object image extracting section 213 captures several past frames of click data assigned object numbers and image data corresponding thereto. Thereafter at step S182, the object image extracting section 213 classifies the click data into a still click and a moving click. When the flow advances from step S135 shown in FIG. 38 to step S137, the flow advances from step S182 shown in FIG. 45 to step S184. In contrast, when the flow advances from step S136 shown in FIG. 38 to step S137, the flow advances from step S182 shown in FIG. 45 to step S184.

当流程从图38所示的步骤S135前进到步骤S137时,流程从图45所示的步骤S182前进到步骤S184。在步骤S184上,对象图像提取部分213获得用于16×16象素的每个块的分配了一个对象号的每个静止点击的一个静止点击数据密度。When the flow advances from step S135 shown in FIG. 38 to step S137, the flow advances from step S182 shown in FIG. 45 to step S184. At step S184, the object image extracting section 213 obtains a still click data density of each still click assigned an object number for each block of 16*16 pixels.

此后,在步骤S185上,对象图像提取部分213确定用于由一个图像虚线框表示的16×16象素的每个块bk的由图46(A)所示的X标记所表示的静止点击的静止点击密度是否等于或大于一个预定值。Thereafter, at step S185, the object image extracting section 213 determines the value of the still click indicated by the X mark shown in FIG. Whether the static click density is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

在发送给接收设备2的一个图像中,具有高静止点击密度的图像部分往往包含一个静止对象图像。因而,当一个特定块的静止点击密度等于或大于预定值时,流程前进到步骤S186。相反,当一个特定块的静止点击密度小于预定值时,流程前进到步骤S190。In an image transmitted to the receiving device 2, an image portion with a high still click density tends to contain a still object image. Thus, when the still click density of a specific block is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the flow proceeds to step S186. On the contrary, when the still click density of a specific block is less than the predetermined value, the flow proceeds to step S190.

在步骤S186,当块的静止点击密度超过一个预定值时,如图46(E)所示,对象图像提取部分213从分配给块的点击数据的对象号中获得最占优的对象号。此后,对象图像提取部分213组合与图46(B)所示的占优对象号相对应的块(BK0,BK2,BK4,和BK5)并构形对象。对象图像提取部分213从图像数据中提取按静止对象图像构形对象的图像。在步骤S186之后,流程前进到图38所示的步骤S138。In step S186, when the still click density of the block exceeds a predetermined value, as shown in FIG. 46(E), the object image extracting section 213 obtains the most dominant object number from the object numbers assigned to the click data of the block. Thereafter, the object image extraction section 213 combines the blocks (BK0, BK2, BK4, and BK5) corresponding to the dominant object numbers shown in FIG. 46(B) and configures the object. The object image extraction section 213 extracts an image of an object configured as a still object image from the image data. After step S186, the flow proceeds to step S138 shown in FIG. 38 .

另一方面,当流程从图38所示的步骤S136前进到步骤S137时,流程从图45所示的步骤S182前进到步骤S183。On the other hand, when the flow advances from step S136 shown in FIG. 38 to step S137, the flow advances from step S182 shown in FIG. 45 to step S183.

在步骤S183上,如图46(C)所示,对象图像提取部分213为分配了与由图46(C)所示的X标记表示的移动点击相同的点击数据对象号的点击位置附近的多个过去帧的图像执行图案匹配操作,并为对应于匹配结果的图像执行移动补偿。At step S183, as shown in FIG. 46(C), the object image extracting section 213 assigns the same click data object number as that of the moving click indicated by the X mark shown in FIG. A pattern matching operation is performed on the images of the past frames, and motion compensation is performed on the images corresponding to the matching results.

此后,在步骤S187上,对象图像提取部分213获得图案匹配图像区域中的一个移动点击密度。Thereafter, at step S187, the object image extracting section 213 obtains a moving click density in the pattern matching image area.

此后,在步骤S188上,对象图像提取部分213确定该图像的由图46(D)所示的X标记的表示的移动点击的移动点击密度是否等于或大于预定值。Thereafter, at step S188, the object image extraction section 213 determines whether or not the movement click density of the movement clicks of the image indicated by the X mark shown in FIG. 46(D) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

进行了移动补偿并且具有一个高移动点击密度的一个图像部分往往包含一个移动对象图像。因而,当进行了移动补偿的一个图像区域的移动点击密度等于或大于预定值时,流程前进到步骤步骤S189。相反,当进行了移动补偿的一个图像区域的移动点击密度小于预定值时,流程前进到步骤步骤S190。An image portion that is motion compensated and has a high motion click density often contains a moving object image. Thus, when the movement click density of an image area subjected to movement compensation is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the flow proceeds to step S189. On the contrary, when the motion click density of an image area subjected to motion compensation is smaller than the predetermined value, the flow proceeds to step S190.

在步骤S189上,对象图像提取部分213为具有等于或大于预定值的一个移动点击密度的一个图像区域从分配给点击数据的对象号中获得最占优的对象号。此后,如图46(D)所示,对象图像提取部分213组合与占优对象号相对应的块(BK3和BK6),并构形对象。此后,对象图像提取部分213从该图像数据中提取按移动对象图像构形的图像。在步骤S189之后,流程前进到图38所示的步骤S138。At step S189, the object image extracting section 213 obtains the most dominant object number from object numbers assigned to the click data for an image region having a moving click density equal to or greater than the predetermined value. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(D), the object image extracting section 213 combines the blocks (BK3 and BK6) corresponding to the dominant object numbers, and configures the object. Thereafter, the object image extracting section 213 extracts an image configured as a moving object image from the image data. After step S189, the flow proceeds to step S138 shown in FIG. 38 .

在步骤S185和S188上,当点击密度小于预定值时,流程前进到步骤S190。在步骤S190上,对象图像提取部分213把具有低静止点击密度或低移动点击密度的一个图像部分处理为当前图像的背景图像区域。换句话说,对象图像提取部分213把已经从图像数据中提取的除静止对象图像和移动对象图像外的图像部分处理为背景图像。在步骤S190之后,流程前进到步骤图38所示的步骤S138。At steps S185 and S188, when the click density is less than the predetermined value, the flow proceeds to step S190. At step S190, the object image extracting section 213 processes an image portion having a low still click density or a low moving click density as a background image area of the current image. In other words, the object image extracting section 213 processes the image portion other than the still object image and the moving object image that has been extracted from the image data as a background image. After step S190, the flow advances to step S138 shown in step FIG. 38 .

在对象图像提取部分213已经从图像数据中提取一个静止对象图像、一个移动对象图像和一个背景图像后,流程前进到图38所示的步骤S138。在步骤S138上,对象图像提取部分213确定对象提取处理是否完成。当步骤S138上的确定结果为否定的时,流程前进到步骤S131。当步骤S138上的确定结果是肯定的时,对象提取部分213则完成了对象提取处理。After the object image extracting section 213 has extracted a still object image, a moving object image, and a background image from the image data, the flow advances to step S138 shown in FIG. 38 . At step S138, the object image extraction section 213 determines whether the object extraction process is completed. When the determined result at step S138 is negative, the flow advances to step S131. When the determined result at step S138 is affirmative, the object extraction section 213 completes the object extraction process.

在上述的处理中,图29所示的发送设备1的对象提取部分1014可以相应于与接收设备2的用户所执行的点击操作相对应的点击数据提取静止对象图像、移动对象图像和背景图像。In the processing described above, object extraction section 1014 of transmitting device 1 shown in FIG.

在图28所示的实施例中,其活动小的平面图像区域(即,没有图像价值)被处理为背景图像。对于该背景图像,不改善空间分辨率。另一方面,可以相应于从接收设备2发送的点击数据提取背景图像,以便改善其空间分辨率。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 28, planar image regions whose activity is small (ie, have no image value) are treated as background images. For this background image, the spatial resolution is not improved. On the other hand, a background image may be extracted corresponding to the click data sent from the receiving device 2 in order to improve its spatial resolution.

在这种情况下,图29所示的背景图像提取部分1013提取与接收设备2发送的点击数据相对应的背景图像。发送处理部分1016发送背景图像,以便按照对象图像的空间分辨率被改善的相同方式改善其空间分辨率。In this case, the background image extraction section 1013 shown in FIG. 29 extracts a background image corresponding to the click data transmitted by the reception device 2 . The transmission processing section 1016 transmits the background image so that its spatial resolution is improved in the same manner as that of the object image is improved.

在这种情况下,如图47所示,图13所示的背景图像标志存储器74被加到图31所示的组合处理部分1022上。除了背景图像标志存储器74之外,图47所示的组合处理部分1022的结构与图35所示的组合处理部分1022的结构相同。如同图13所示的结构,在图47所示的结构中,当背景图像写入部分17把一个具有高空间分辨率的对象的背景图像写入到背景图像存储器73时,相应于组成背景图像的每个象素在背景图像标志存储器74的一个地址上存储的背景图像标志从“0”变为“1”。换句话说,当背景图像写入部分71把背景图像数据写入到背景图像存储器73时,背景图像写入部分71核对背景图像标志存储器74。当背景图像标志为“1”(即,当背景图像存储器73已经存储具有高空间分辨率的背景图像数据)时,背景图像写入部分71不把具有低空间分辨率的背景图像数据写入到背景图像存储器73。无论何时向背景图像写入部分71供应背景图像数据,该背景图像数据都被写入到背景图像写入部分71。然而,当背景图像存储器73已经存储具有高空间分辨率的背景图像数据时,背景图像写入部分71不把具有低空间分辨率的背景图像数据写入到背景图像存储器73。因而,无论何时向背景图像写入部分71供应具有高空间分辨率的背景图像数据,具有高空间分辨率的背景图像的数目都增加到背景图像存储器73中。In this case, as shown in FIG. 47, the background image flag memory 74 shown in FIG. 13 is added to the combination processing section 1022 shown in FIG. The structure of the combination processing section 1022 shown in FIG. 47 is the same as that of the combination processing section 1022 shown in FIG. 35 except for the background image flag memory 74 . Like the structure shown in FIG. 13, in the structure shown in FIG. 47, when the background image writing section 17 writes a background image of an object with a high spatial resolution into the background image memory 73, corresponding to the constituent background image The background image flag stored at an address of the background image flag memory 74 changes from "0" to "1" for each pixel. In other words, when the background image writing section 71 writes background image data to the background image memory 73 , the background image writing section 71 checks the background image flag memory 74 . When the background image flag is "1" (that is, when the background image memory 73 has stored the background image data with high spatial resolution), the background image writing section 71 does not write the background image data with low spatial resolution into background image memory 73 . Whenever background image data is supplied to the background image writing section 71 , the background image data is written to the background image writing section 71 . However, the background image writing section 71 does not write the background image data having a low spatial resolution to the background image memory 73 when the background image memory 73 already stores background image data having a high spatial resolution. Thus, whenever the background image data with high spatial resolution is supplied to the background image writing section 71 , the number of background images with high spatial resolution is increased in the background image memory 73 .

在该实例中,当组合部分1077接收到来自图31所示的点击数据输入部分1024的点击数据时,组合部分1077从背景图像存储器73和对象存储器75中读出对象图像数据和背景图像数据,这些数据包含在点击数据中含有的一个考虑点的坐标位置,并把获得的数据供应给子窗口存储器79。In this instance, when the combination section 1077 receives click data from the click data input section 1024 shown in FIG. These data contain the coordinate position of a considered point contained in the click data, and the obtained data is supplied to the sub-window memory 79 .

下面说明确定(认同)接收设备2的用户的兴趣对象区域的变化和归类每个兴趣对象区域的技术。A technique for determining (approving) changes in object-of-interest areas of the user of the receiving device 2 and classifying each object-of-interest area will be described below.

各种类型的图像被分析,以确定用户感兴趣的对象区域是否已经改变以及是否归类了每个兴趣对象区域。该分析显示了以下结果。Various types of images are analyzed to determine whether object areas of interest to the user have changed and whether each object area of interest is classified. This analysis revealed the following results.

首先,人们(用户)的兴趣对象区域是具有价值的区域单元(例如,一个对象)。First, the interest object area of people (users) is a valuable area unit (eg, an object).

第二,当用户的兴趣对象变化时,具有价值的每个区域单元改变。Second, when the user's interest object changes, each area unit with value changes.

第三,当用户的兴趣对象改变时,指定用户感兴趣的对象所需的输入时间周期往往变长。Third, when the user's object of interest changes, the input time period required to specify the user's object of interest tends to become longer.

第四,当用户的兴趣对象改变时,用户指定一个兴趣对象区域(例如,点击操作)的输入位置之间的空间距离往往相对地变长。Fourth, when the user's object of interest changes, the spatial distance between the input positions where the user designates an object of interest area (for example, click operation) tends to become relatively longer.

因而,图48示出了发送设备1的结构实例,它获得与接收设备2的用户输入的点击数据相对应的输入时间间隔和输入位置距离,确定接收设备2的用户的兴趣对象区域是否由于考虑到分析结果(1)至(4)而改变,并归类兴趣对象区域。图48中示出的发送设备1是图28所示的发送设备1的改良。为了简便起见,在图48中,和图29相似的部分由相似的参考标号表示,并省略其说明。换句话说,除了变化确定和归类部分240被新设置为组成预处理部分12的一个模块外,图48所示的发送设备1的结构与图29所示的发送设备1的结构基本相同。Thus, FIG. 48 shows a structural example of the sending device 1, which obtains the input time interval and the input position distance corresponding to the click data input by the user of the receiving device 2, determines whether the user's interest object area of the receiving device 2 is due to consideration Changes to analysis results (1) to (4), and classify object-of-interest regions. The transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 48 is a modification of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 28 . For the sake of brevity, in Fig. 48, parts similar to those in Fig. 29 are denoted by like reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. In other words, the configuration of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG. 48 is basically the same as that of the transmission device 1 shown in FIG.

根据图48所示的实施例,变化确定和归类部分240被设置在预处理部分12中。另一方面,变化确定和归类部分240可以被设置在预处理部分12的对象提取部分1014或背景图像提取部分1013中。再一方面,变化确定和归类部分240还可以独立于预处理部分12设置。According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 48 , the variation determination and classification section 240 is provided in the preprocessing section 12 . On the other hand, the variation determination and classification section 240 may be provided in the object extraction section 1014 or the background image extraction section 1013 of the preprocessing section 12 . On the other hand, the change determination and classification part 240 can also be set independently from the preprocessing part 12 .

在该实施例中,用点击数据表示的一个位置是用户正在考虑的一个考虑点。用户的一个考虑点可以不是点击数据,而是,用户的考虑点可以通过检测用户的观看方向来认同。In this embodiment, a position indicated by the click data is a point of consideration that the user is considering. A point of consideration of the user may not be click data, but the point of consideration of the user may be recognized by detecting the viewing direction of the user.

图49示出了图48所示的变化确定和归类部分240的结构实例。FIG. 49 shows an example of the structure of the change determination and classification section 240 shown in FIG. 48 .

输入图像存储部分231暂时存储由图像输入部分11输出的图像数据。必要时,输入图像存储部分231把图像数据供应给周边区域提取部分233以及静止区域和移动区域确定部分234。The input image storage section 231 temporarily stores image data output by the image input section 11 . The input image storage section 231 supplies image data to the peripheral area extraction section 233 and the still area and moving area determination section 234 as necessary.

点击数据获得部分230暂时存储接收设备2经传送路径3发送的数据,并把存储的点击数据供应给周边区域提取部分233、静止区域和移动区域确定部分234、输入时间间隔计算部分237、和输入位置距离计算部分238。The click data obtaining section 230 temporarily stores the data transmitted by the receiving device 2 via the transmission path 3, and supplies the stored click data to the surrounding area extracting section 233, the stationary area and the moving area determining section 234, the input time interval calculating section 237, and the input time interval calculating section 237. The location distance calculation part 238 .

在该实施例中,与图37所示的图像存储器201一样,可以设置输入图像存储部分231。此外,与图37所示的点击数据存储器202一样,可以设置点击数据存储部分232。In this embodiment, like the image memory 201 shown in FIG. 37, an input image storage section 231 may be provided. Furthermore, like the click data storage 202 shown in FIG. 37, a click data storage section 232 may be provided.

点击周边区域提取部分233从输入图像存储部分231供给的图像数据中提取与点击数据存储部分232供给的点击数据相对应的图像区域(该图像区域是例如点击位置附近的局部小块;在下文中,图像区域被称之为点击周边区域)。由点击周边区域提取部分233提取的点击周边区域的数据被发送给点击周边区域存储部分235。在数据被存储到点击周边区域存储部分235后,该数据被发送给兴趣对象区域归类部分236。The click peripheral area extraction section 233 extracts an image area corresponding to the click data supplied from the click data storage section 232 from the image data supplied from the input image storage section 231 (the image area is, for example, a local small block near the click position; hereinafter, The image area is referred to as the click surrounding area). The data of the clicked surrounding area extracted by the clicked surrounding area extraction section 233 is sent to the clicked surrounding area storage section 235 . After the data is stored in the click peripheral area storage section 235 , the data is sent to the interest object area classification section 236 .

此外,静止和移动区域确定部分234相应于从输入图像存储部分231供应的图像数据和从点击数据存储部分232供应的点击数据使用与图37所示的实施例相同方式的帧间差值执行静止区域和移动区域确定处理。In addition, the still and moving area determining section 234 performs still using the difference between frames in the same manner as the embodiment shown in FIG. 37 corresponding to the image data supplied from the input image storage section 231 and the click data supplied from the click data storage section 232. Area and moving area determination processing.

点击周边区域提取处理以及静止区域和移动区域确定处理可以通过结合附图38所述的相同处理来完成。因而,省略对这些处理的详细说明。在图49所示的实施例中,以上述实施例相同的方式把点击数据被确定为静止点击或移动点击的结果输出为静止点击或移动点击确定。此外,例如,可以输出点击周边区域被确定为静止区域或移动区域的结果。根据图49所示的实施例,为简便起见,作为静止区域和移动区域确定的结果,将说明静止点击或移动点击被输出的情况。Click surrounding area extraction processing and still area and moving area determination processing can be performed by the same processing as described in connection with FIG. 38 . Therefore, a detailed description of these processes is omitted. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 49, the result of the click data being determined as a stationary click or a moving click is output as a stationary click or moving click determination in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment. Also, for example, a result that the clicked peripheral area is determined to be a stationary area or a moving area may be output. According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 49, for the sake of brevity, a case where a stationary click or a moving click is output as a result of determination of a stationary area and a moving area will be described.

静止区域和移动区域确定部分234的静止区域和移动区域确定结果被发送给输入时间间隔计算部分237和输入位置距离计算部分238。The still area and moving area determination results of the still area and moving area determining section 234 are sent to the input time interval calculating section 237 and the input position distance calculating section 238 .

当静止区域和移动区域确定结果表明点击数据是静止点击时,输入时间间隔计算部分237计算前一点击的输入时间与当前点击的输入时间的时间间隔。在此情况下,计算时间间隔,而不考虑例如一个移动点击是否发生在前一静止点击的输入时间与当前静止点击的输入时间之间。输入时间间隔计算部分237计算的时间间隔的数据被发送给兴趣变化确定部分239。When the still area and moving area determination results indicate that the click data is a still click, the input time interval calculation section 237 calculates the time interval between the input time of the previous click and the input time of the current click. In this case, the time interval is calculated regardless of whether, for example, a moving click occurs between the input time of the previous stationary click and the input time of the current stationary click. The data of the time interval calculated by the input time interval calculation section 237 is sent to the interest change determination section 239 .

当静止区域和移动区域确定结果表明点击数据是静止点击时,输入位置距离计算部分238计算前一静止点击的输入点击位置(坐标位置)与当前静止点击的输入点击位置(坐标位置)之间的空间距离。在此情况下,计算空间距离,而不考虑例如在当前静止点击的输入位置与前一静止点击的输入位置之间是否存在例如一个移动点击的输入位置。输入位置距离计算部分238计算的空间距离的数据被发送给兴趣变化确定部分239。When the still area and moving area determination results indicate that the click data is a still click, the input position distance calculating section 238 calculates the distance between the input click position (coordinate position) of the previous still click and the input click position (coordinate position) of the current still click. space distance. In this case, the spatial distance is calculated regardless of whether, for example, an input position of a moving click exists between the input position of the current stationary click and the input position of the previous stationary click. Data of the spatial distance calculated by the input position distance calculation section 238 is sent to the interest change determination section 239 .

当静止区域和移动区域确定结果点击数据是静止点击时,兴趣变化确定部分239相应于输入时间间隔计算部分237计算的时间间隔和位置距离计算部分238计算的空间距离确定用户的兴趣对象是否变化。换句话说,兴趣变化确定部分239执行时间间隔和空间距离的预定加权处理,确定加权时间间隔是否超过一个预定阈值(时间),并确定加权空间距离是否超过一个预定阈值(距离)。当加权时间间隔超过预定阈值和/或加权空间距离超过预定阈值时,兴趣变化确定部分239确定用户的兴趣对象已经改变。兴趣对象确定部分239把兴趣对象变化确定结果发送给兴趣对象区域归类部分236。When the static area and the moving area determination result click data are static clicks, the interest change determination section 239 determines whether the user's interest object changes corresponding to the time interval calculated by the input time interval calculation section 237 and the spatial distance calculated by the position distance calculation section 238. In other words, the interest change determination section 239 performs predetermined weighting processing of time intervals and spatial distances, determines whether the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold (time), and determines whether the weighted spatial distance exceeds a predetermined threshold (distance). When the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold and/or the weighted spatial distance exceeds a predetermined threshold, the interest change determination section 239 determines that the user's object of interest has changed. The object of interest determination section 239 sends the object of interest change determination result to the object of interest area classification section 236 .

当兴趣变化确定部分239的确定结果表明用户的兴趣对象未改变时,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前静止点击的点击周边区域被包含在与前一(过去)静止点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象相同的图像区域中,把当前静止点击的点击周边区域归类为与前一静止点击的点击周边区域相同的兴趣对象区域(例如,把相同的类别号分配给当前静止点击的点击周边区域),并输出归类的结果。换句话说,当为每个对象归类兴趣对象区域时,按照上述实施例的相同方式分配相同的对象号。When the determined result of the interest change determination section 239 shows that the user's object of interest has not changed, the interest object area classification section 236 determines that the clicked peripheral area of the current static click is contained in the clicked peripheral area corresponding to the previous (past) static click In the same image area as the object of interest of the current static click, the click surrounding area of the current static click is classified as the same interest object area as the click surrounding area of the previous static click (for example, the same category number is assigned to the click surrounding area of the current static click region), and output the classification results. In other words, when classifying object regions of interest for each object, the same object number is assigned in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

相反,当兴趣变化确定部分239的确定结果表明用户的兴趣对象已经改变时,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前静止点击的点击周边区域未被包含在与前一(过去)静止点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象区域中,则输出当前静止点击的点击周边图像的存储数据,并且重新设置已经在点击周边区域存储部分235中存储的数据。此后,兴趣对象区域归类部分236把当前静止点击的点击周边区域归类为与前一静止点击的点击周边区域不同的兴趣对象区域(例如,把一个不同的类别号分配给当前静止点击的点击周边区域)。换句话说,当为每个对象归类一个兴趣对象区域时,以上述情况的相同方式分配一个新的不同对象号。On the contrary, when the determined result of the interest change determination part 239 shows that the user's interest object has changed, the interest object area classification part 236 determines that the click surrounding area of the current static click is not included in the click surrounding area of the previous (past) static click. In the area of the object of interest corresponding to the area, the stored data of the clicked surrounding image currently clicked is output, and the data stored in the clicked surrounding area storage part 235 is reset. Thereafter, the interest object area classification part 236 classifies the clicked surrounding area of the current static click as an interest object area different from the clicked surrounding area of the previous static click (for example, assigning a different category number to the click of the current static click surrounding area). In other words, when classifying an object-of-interest area for each object, a new different object number is assigned in the same manner as in the above case.

当静止区域和移动区域确定结果表明点击数据是移动点击时,输入时间间隔计算部分237同样计算前一移动点击的输入时间与当前移动点击的输入时间之间的时间间隔。在此情况下,时间间隔被计算,而不考虑例如静止点击是否在当前移动点击的输入时间与前一移动点击的输入时间之间发生。输入时间间隔计算部分237计算的时间间隔的数据被发送给兴趣变化确定部分239。When the still area and moving area determination results indicate that the click data is a moving click, the input time interval calculating section 237 also calculates the time interval between the input time of the previous moving click and the input time of the current moving click. In this case, the time interval is calculated regardless of whether, for example, a stationary click occurred between the input time of the current movement click and the input time of the previous movement click. The data of the time interval calculated by the input time interval calculation section 237 is sent to the interest change determination section 239 .

相反,当静止区域和移动区域确定结果表明点击数据是移动点击时,同样输入位置距离计算部分238计算前一移动点击的输入点击位置与当前移动点击的输入点击位置之间的空间距离。在此情况下,空间距离被计算,而不考虑例如是否在当前移动点击的输入位置与前一移动点击的输入位置之间存在一个静止点击的输入位置。输入位置距离计算部分238计算的空间距离的数据被发送给兴趣变化确定部分239。Conversely, when the still area and moving area determination results indicate that the click data is a moving click, the input position distance calculation section 238 also calculates the spatial distance between the input click position of the previous movement click and the input click position of the current movement click. In this case, the spatial distance is calculated regardless of, for example, whether there is an input position of a still click between the input position of the current movement click and the input position of the previous movement click. Data of the spatial distance calculated by the input position distance calculation section 238 is sent to the interest change determination section 239 .

此外,在静止区域和移动区域确定结果表明点击数据是一个移动点击的情况下,兴趣变化确定部分239相应于输入时间间隔计算部分237计算的时间间隔和位置距离计算部分238计算的空间距离来确定用户的兴趣对象是否已经改变。换句话说,兴趣变化确定部分239执行时间间隔和空间距离的预定加权处理,确定加权时间间隔是否超过预定阈值(时间),并确定加权空间间隔是否超过预定阈值(距离)。当加权时间间隔超过预定阈值和/或加权空间距离超过预定阈值时,兴趣变化确定部分239确定用户的兴趣对象已经改变。兴趣变化确定部分239的兴趣对象变化确定结果被发送给兴趣对象区域归类部分236。In addition, in the case where the still area and moving area determination results indicate that the click data is a moving click, the interest change determination section 239 determines correspondingly to the time interval calculated by the input time interval calculation section 237 and the spatial distance calculated by the position distance calculation section 238 Whether the user's object of interest has changed. In other words, the interest change determination section 239 performs predetermined weighting processing of the time interval and the space distance, determines whether the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold (time), and determines whether the weighted space interval exceeds a predetermined threshold (distance). When the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold and/or the weighted spatial distance exceeds a predetermined threshold, the interest change determination section 239 determines that the user's object of interest has changed. The object of interest change determination result of the interest change determination section 239 is sent to the object of interest area classification section 236 .

当兴趣变化确定部分239的确定结果表明用户的兴趣对象未变化时,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前移动点击的点击周边区域被包含在与前一(过去)移动点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象区域相同的图像区域中,把当前移动点击的点击周边区域归类为和前一(旧的)移动点击的点击周边区域相同的兴趣对象区域(即,把相同的类别号分配给当前移动点击的点击周边区域),并输出归类结果。换句话说,当为每个对象归类一个兴趣对象区域时,分配相同的对象号。When the determination result of the interest change determination part 239 shows that the interest object of the user has not changed, the interest object area classification part 236 determines that the clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click is contained in the clicked surrounding area corresponding to the previous (past) mobile click In the same image area as the object of interest area of the current mobile click, the clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click is classified as the same interest object area as the clicked surrounding area of the previous (old) mobile click (that is, the same category number is assigned to the current Click the surrounding area of the mobile click), and output the classification result. In other words, when classifying an object area of interest for each object, the same object number is assigned.

相反,当兴趣变化确定部分239的确定结果表明用户的兴趣对象变化时,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前移动点击的点击周边区域未被包含在与前一(过去)移动点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象区域中,输出当前移动点击的点击周边图像的存储数据,并且重新设置已经在点击周边区域存储部分235中存储的数据。此后,兴趣对象区域归类部分236把当前移动点击的点击周边区域归类为与前一移动点击的点击周边区域不同的兴趣对象区域(例如,把一个不同的类别号分配给当前移动点击的点击周边区域)。换句话说,当为每个对象归类一个兴趣对象区域时,分配一个新的不同对象号。On the contrary, when the determined result of the interest change determination section 239 shows that the user's interest object changes, the interest object area classification section 236 determines that the clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click is not included in the clicked surrounding area of the previous (past) mobile click. In the corresponding interest object area, the stored data of the clicked surrounding image of the current movement click is output, and the data already stored in the clicked surrounding area storage section 235 is reset. Thereafter, the interest object area classification part 236 classifies the clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click as an interest object area different from the clicked surrounding area of the previous mobile click (for example, assigning a different category number to the clicked area of the current mobile click surrounding area). In other words, when classifying an object region of interest for each object, a new distinct object number is assigned.

下面结合图50所示的流程图说明图49所示的变化确定和归类部分240的处理。The processing of the change determination and classification section 240 shown in FIG. 49 will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 50 .

在步骤S201,变化确定和归类部分240接收来自图像输入部分11的图像数据和由接收设备2的用户输入的点击数据。In step S201 , the change determination and classification section 240 receives image data from the image input section 11 and click data input by the user of the receiving device 2 .

此后,在步骤S202上,图像输入部分11供应的图像数据被存储在输入图像存储部分231。点击数据获得部分230所获得的点击数据被存储在点击数据存储部分232中。Thereafter, at step S202 , the image data supplied from the image input section 11 is stored in the input image storage section 231 . The click data obtained by the click data obtaining section 230 is stored in the click data storage section 232 .

此后,在步骤S203上,点击周边区域提取部分233从已经被存储并从输入图像存储部分231中读出的图像的点击数据中提取与点击数据相对应的一个图像区域(点击周边区域)。在步骤S204上,点击周边区域存储部分235存储已经被提取的点击周边区域的数据。Thereafter, at step S203 , the click peripheral area extracting section 233 extracts an image area (click peripheral area) corresponding to the click data from the click data of the image which has been stored and read out from the input image storage section 231 . At step S204, the clicked surrounding area storage section 235 stores the data of the clicked surrounding area which has been extracted.

此后,在步骤S205,静止区域和移动区域确定区域234按上述方式使用帧间差值执行静止区域和移动区域确定处理。Thereafter, in step S205, the still area and moving area determination area 234 performs still area and moving area determination processing using the inter-frame difference values in the above-described manner.

在步骤S205,当步骤S205上确定的结果表明点击数据是静止点击时,流程前进到步骤S206。相反,当步骤S205上的确定结果表明点击数据是移动点击时,流程前进到步骤S212。At step S205, when the determined result at step S205 indicates that the click data is a still click, the flow proceeds to step S206. In contrast, when the determined result at step S205 indicates that the click data is a movement click, the flow proceeds to step S212.

当步骤S205上的确定结果表明点击数据是静止点击,流程前进到步骤S206。在步骤S206上,输入时间间隔计算部分237计算前一静止点击的输入时间与当前静止点击的输入时间之间的时间间隔。该时间间隔被计算,而不考虑例如在当前静止点击的输入时间与前一静止点击的输入时间之间是否存在一个移动点击。When the determined result at step S205 indicates that the click data is a still click, the flow proceeds to step S206. At step S206, the input time interval calculation section 237 calculates the time interval between the input time of the previous stationary click and the input time of the current stationary click. This time interval is calculated regardless of whether, for example, there is a moving click between the input time of the current stationary click and the input time of the previous stationary click.

此后,在步骤S207上,输入位置距离计算部分238计算前一静止点击的输入点击位置(坐标位置)与当前静止点击的输入点击位置(坐标位置)之间的空间距离。在此情况下,计算空间距离,而不考虑例如在当前静止点击的输入位置与前一静止点击的输入位置之间存在一个移动点击的输入位置。Thereafter, at step S207, the input position distance calculation section 238 calculates the spatial distance between the input click position (coordinate position) of the previous stationary click and the input click position (coordinate position) of the current stationary click. In this case, the spatial distance is calculated without considering, for example, that an input position of a moving click exists between the input position of the current stationary click and the input position of the previous stationary click.

在步骤S208上,兴趣对象确定部分239相应于步骤S206上计算的时间间隔和步骤S207上计算的空间距离确定用户的兴趣对象是否变化。换句话说,如上所述,兴趣变化确定部分239执行时间间隔和空间间隔的预定加权处理,确定加权时间间隔是否超过一个预定阈值(时间),和确定加权空间距离是否超过一个预定阈值(距离)。当加权时间间隔超过预定阈值和/或加权空间距离超过预定阈值时,兴趣变化确定部分239确定用户的兴趣对象已经改变。当步骤S208上的确定结果表明兴趣对象已经改变时,流程前进到步骤步骤S209。当步骤S208上的确定结果表明兴趣对象未改变时,流程前进到步骤S211。At step S208, the object of interest determination section 239 determines whether the object of interest of the user changes corresponding to the time interval calculated at step S206 and the spatial distance calculated at step S207. In other words, as described above, the interest change determination section 239 performs predetermined weighting processing of the time interval and the space interval, determines whether the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold (time), and determines whether the weighted space distance exceeds a predetermined threshold (distance) . When the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold and/or the weighted spatial distance exceeds a predetermined threshold, the interest change determination section 239 determines that the user's object of interest has changed. When the determined result at step S208 indicates that the object of interest has changed, the flow proceeds to step S209. When the determined result at step S208 indicates that the object of interest has not changed, the flow proceeds to step S211.

当步骤S208上的确定结果表明兴趣对象未改变时,流程前进到步骤步骤S211。在步骤S211,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前静止点击的点击周边区域被包含在与前一(过去)静止点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象区域相同的图像区域中,并把当前静止点击的点击周边区域归类为和前一静止点击的点击周边区域相同的兴趣对象区域(即,把相同的类别号分配给当前静止点击的点击周边区域)。换句话说,当为每个对象归类一个兴趣对象区域时,以上述实施例相同的方式分配相同的对象号。在步骤S211之后,流程前进到步骤S218。When the determined result at step S208 indicates that the object of interest has not changed, the flow advances to step S211. In step S211, the interest object area classification part 236 determines that the clicked surrounding area of the current still click is contained in the same image area as the interest object area corresponding to the clicked surrounding area of the previous (past) still click, and classifies the current still click The clicked surrounding area is classified as the same ROI as the clicked surrounding area of the previous static click (that is, the same category number is assigned to the clicked surrounding area of the current static click). In other words, when classifying an object-of-interest area for each object, the same object number is assigned in the same manner as in the above-mentioned embodiment. After step S211, the flow proceeds to step S218.

相反,当在步骤S208上确定结果表明用户的兴趣对象改变时,流程前进到步骤步骤S209。在步骤S209上,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前静止点击的点击周边区域未被包含在与前一(旧的)静止点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象区域中,输出当前静止点击的点击周边图像的存储数据,并且重新设置存储的数据。此后,在步骤S210上,兴趣对象区域归类部分236把当前静止点击的点击周边区域归类为与前一静止点击的点击周边区域不同的兴趣对象区域(例如,把一个不同的类别号分配给当前静止点击的点击周边区域)。换句话说,当为每个对象归类一个兴趣对象区域时,以上述实施例相同的方式分配一个新的不同对象号。在步骤S211之后,流程前进到步骤S218。In contrast, when the determined result at step S208 indicates that the user's object of interest has changed, the flow advances to step S209. In step S209, the interest object area classification part 236 determines that the click surrounding area of the current static click is not included in the interest object area corresponding to the click surrounding area of the previous (old) static click, and outputs the current static click. Click the memory data of the peripheral image, and reset the memory data. Thereafter, at step S210, the object of interest area classification part 236 classifies the clicked surrounding area of the current static click into an object of interest area different from the clicked surrounding area of the previous static click (for example, assigning a different category number to The area around the click of the current static click). In other words, when classifying an object-of-interest area for each object, a new different object number is assigned in the same manner as in the above-mentioned embodiment. After step S211, the flow proceeds to step S218.

相反,当步骤S205上的确定结果表明点击数据是移动点击时,流程前进到步骤S212。在步骤S212上,兴趣变化确定部分239计算前一移动点击的输入时间与当前移动点击的输入时间之间的时间间隔。在此情况下,时间间隔被计算,而不考虑例如在当前移动点击的输入时间与前一移动点击的输入时间之间是否存在一个静止点击。In contrast, when the determined result at step S205 indicates that the click data is a movement click, the flow proceeds to step S212. At step S212, the interest change determination section 239 calculates the time interval between the input time of the previous movement click and the input time of the current movement click. In this case, the time interval is calculated regardless of whether, for example, there is a still click between the input time of the current movement click and the input time of the previous movement click.

此后,在步骤S213,兴趣变化确定部分239计算前一移动点击的输入点击位置与当前移动点击的输入点击位置之间的空间距离。在此情况下,该空间距离被计算,而不考虑例如在当前移动点击的输入位置与前一移动点击的输入位置之间是否存在一个静止点击的输入位置。Thereafter, in step S213, the interest change determination section 239 calculates the spatial distance between the input click position of the previous movement click and the input click position of the current movement click. In this case, the spatial distance is calculated irrespective of, for example, whether there is an input position of a stationary click between the input position of the current movement click and the input position of the previous movement click.

此后,在步骤S214,兴趣变化确定部分239相应于在步骤S212上计算的时间间隔和在步骤S213上计算的空间距离确定用户的兴趣对象是否变化。换句话说,兴趣变化确定部分239执行时间间隔和空间距离的预定加权处理,确定加权时间间隔是否超过一个预定阈值(时间),和确定加权空间距离是否超过一个预定阈值(距离)。当加权时间间隔超过预定阈值和/或加权空间距离超过预定阈值时,兴趣变化确定部分239确定用户的兴趣对象已经改变。当步骤S214上的确定结果表明兴趣对象已经改变时,流程前进到步骤S215。当步骤S214上的确定结果表明兴趣对象未改变时,流程前进到步骤S217。Thereafter, at step S214, the interest change determination section 239 determines whether the user's object of interest has changed corresponding to the time interval calculated at step S212 and the spatial distance calculated at step S213. In other words, the interest change determination section 239 performs predetermined weighting processing of time intervals and spatial distances, determines whether the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold (time), and determines whether the weighted spatial distance exceeds a predetermined threshold (distance). When the weighted time interval exceeds a predetermined threshold and/or the weighted spatial distance exceeds a predetermined threshold, the interest change determination section 239 determines that the user's object of interest has changed. When the determined result at step S214 indicates that the object of interest has changed, the flow proceeds to step S215. When the determined result at step S214 indicates that the object of interest has not changed, the flow proceeds to step S217.

当步骤S214上的确定结果表明用户的兴趣对象未改变时,流程前进到步骤S217。在步骤S217,如上所述,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前移动点击的点击周边区域被包含在与对应于前一(过去)移动点击的点击周边区域的兴趣对象相同的图像区域中,把当前移动点击的点击周边区域归类为与前一移动点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象区域(例如,把相同的类别号分配给当前移动点击的点击周边区域)。换句话说,当为每个对象归类一个兴趣对象区域时,按照上述实施例的相同方式分配相同的对象号。在步骤S217之后,流程前进到步骤S218。When the determined result at step S214 indicates that the user's object of interest has not changed, the flow proceeds to step S217. In step S217, as described above, the interest object area classification part 236 determines that the clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click is contained in the same image area as the interest object corresponding to the clicked surrounding area of the previous (past) mobile click, and The clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click is classified as the ROI corresponding to the clicked surrounding area of the previous mobile click (for example, the same category number is assigned to the clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click). In other words, when classifying an object-of-interest area for each object, the same object number is assigned in the same manner as in the above-mentioned embodiment. After step S217, the flow advances to step S218.

相反,当步骤S214上的确定结果表明用户的兴趣对象已经改变时,流程前进到步骤S215。在步骤S215,兴趣对象区域归类部分236确定当前移动点击的点击周边区域未被包含在与前一(过去)移动点击的点击周边区域相对应的兴趣对象区域中,输出当前移动点击的点击周边图像的存储数据,并且重新设置存储的数据。此后在步骤S216,兴趣对象区域归类部分236把当前移动点击的点击周边区域归类为与前一移动点击的点击周边区域不同的兴趣对象区域(例如,把一个不同的类别号分配给当前移动点击的点击周边区域)。换句话说,当为每个对象归类一个兴趣对象区域时,以上述实施例的相同方式分配一个新的不同对象号。在步骤S216之后,流程前进到步骤S218。In contrast, when the determined result at step S214 indicates that the user's object of interest has changed, the flow proceeds to step S215. In step S215, the interest object area classification part 236 determines that the click surrounding area of the current mobile click is not included in the interest object area corresponding to the click surrounding area of the previous (past) mobile click, and outputs the click surrounding area of the current mobile click Store data of the image, and reset the stored data. Thereafter in step S216, the object of interest area classification part 236 classifies the clicked surrounding area of the current mobile click as an object of interest area different from the clicked surrounding area of the previous mobile click (for example, a different category number is assigned to the current mobile Click on the surrounding area of the click). In other words, when classifying an object-of-interest area for each object, a new different object number is assigned in the same manner as in the above-mentioned embodiment. After step S216, the flow proceeds to step S218.

在步骤S210、S211、S216和S217之后,流程前进到步骤S218。在步骤S218,变化确定和归类部分240确定所有的处理是否已经完成。当步骤S218上的确定结果是否定时,流程返回到步骤S201。当步骤S218上确定结果是肯定时,变化确定和归类部分240完成图50所示的处理。After steps S210, S211, S216 and S217, the flow proceeds to step S218. In step S218, the change determination and classification section 240 determines whether all processing has been completed. When the determined result at step S218 is negative, the flow returns to step S201. When the determined result at step S218 is positive, the change determination and classification section 240 completes the processing shown in FIG. 50 .

下面,结合图51所示的流程图说明图50所示的在步骤S208和S214上的兴趣对象变化确定处理。Next, the object of interest change determination processing at steps S208 and S214 shown in FIG. 50 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 51 .

在步骤S221,兴趣变化确定部分239获得时间间隔的信息。此后,在步骤S222,兴趣变化确定部分239执行时间间隔的预定加权处理。在步骤S223,兴趣变化确定处理部分239获得空间距离的信息。此后,在步骤S224,兴趣变化确定部分239执行空间距离的预定加权处理。步骤S221和S222的顺序可以改变。同样,步骤S223和S224的顺序也可以改变。时间间隔的加权处理可以通过压缩时间单位(例如,ms/10的压缩)来执行。空间距离的加权处理可以通过在水平方向和垂直方向上压缩象素间距来执行。In step S221, the interest change determination section 239 obtains information of a time interval. Thereafter, in step S222, the interest change determination section 239 executes predetermined weighting processing of time intervals. In step S223, the interest change determination processing section 239 obtains information of the spatial distance. Thereafter, in step S224, the interest change determination section 239 performs predetermined weighting processing of the spatial distance. The order of steps S221 and S222 may be changed. Likewise, the order of steps S223 and S224 can also be changed. The weighting process of the time interval can be performed by compressing the time unit (for example, compression of ms/10). The weighting process of the spatial distance can be performed by compressing the pixel pitch in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

此后,流程前进到步骤S225。在步骤S225上,兴趣变化确定部分239使用加权时间间隔(t)和电平及垂直方向上的加权空间距离(X坐标和Y坐标)生成三维矢量,并获得该三维矢量的大小。该三维矢量的大小是通过以下计算获得的:在将时间轴(t)加到点击数据的输入位置的X坐标轴和Y坐标轴的三维空间上计算当前输入点与前一输入点之间的欧几里得(Euclidean)距离。在步骤S225之后,流程前进到步骤S226。Thereafter, the flow advances to step S225. At step S225, the interest change determination section 239 generates a three-dimensional vector using the weighted time interval (t) and the weighted spatial distance (X coordinate and Y coordinate) in the horizontal and vertical directions, and obtains the magnitude of the three-dimensional vector. The size of this three-dimensional vector is obtained by calculating the distance between the current input point and the previous input point on the three-dimensional space that adds the time axis (t) to the X-coordinate axis and Y-coordinate axis of the input position of the click data. Euclidean distance. After step S225, the flow advances to step S226.

在步骤S226上,兴趣变化确定部分239确定步骤S225上获得的三维矢量的大小是否超过预定阈值。当步骤S226上的确定结果表明三维矢量的大小未超过预定阈值时,流程前进到步骤步骤S227。在步骤S227,兴趣变化确定部分239确定接收设备2的用户的兴趣对象未变化。当三维矢量的大小超过预定阈值时,流程前进到步骤S228。在步骤S228,兴趣变化确定处理部分239确定用户的兴趣对象已经改变。At step S226, the interest change determination section 239 determines whether the size of the three-dimensional vector obtained at step S225 exceeds a predetermined threshold. When the determined result at step S226 indicates that the size of the three-dimensional vector does not exceed the predetermined threshold, the flow proceeds to step S227. In step S227, the interest change determination section 239 determines that the object of interest of the user of the receiving device 2 has not changed. When the size of the three-dimensional vector exceeds the predetermined threshold, the flow proceeds to step S228. In step S228, the interest change determination processing section 239 determines that the user's object of interest has changed.

在上述方式中,变化确定和归类部分240相应于接收设备2发送的点击数据完成用户的兴趣对象变化确定和其归类。In the manner described above, the change determination and classification section 240 completes the change determination of the user's object of interest and its classification corresponding to the click data transmitted from the receiving device 2 .

此外,当接收设备2的用户的兴趣对象区域被归类时,可以最佳地处理被归类的兴趣对象区域。换句话说,分配给用户的每个兴趣对象区域的信息量可以改变。例如,大信息量可以分配给用户的特定兴趣对象区域。另一方面,可以优先发送用户的兴趣对象区域的数据。Furthermore, when the object-of-interest areas of the user of the receiving device 2 are categorized, the categorized object-of-interest areas can be optimally processed. In other words, the amount of information assigned to each object of interest area of the user may vary. For example, a large amount of information can be assigned to a user's specific interest object area. On the other hand, the data of the user's interest object area may be sent preferentially.

此外,可以发送从点击周边区域存储部分235中为兴趣对象区域236读出的一个图像区域,以便按上述方式改善空间分辨率。In addition, an image area read out from the clicked peripheral area storage section 235 for the object of interest area 236 may be transmitted in order to improve the spatial resolution in the above-described manner.

在此情况下,即使接收设备2的用户错误地点击非兴趣对象区域,也可以避免执行错误的确定。In this case, even if the user of the receiving device 2 taps the non-interest object area by mistake, it is possible to avoid performing erroneous determination.

根据该实施例,即使具有兴趣对象区域意义的一个对象在时间或空间上与另一个对象分离,它们也可以被归类为一个对象。此外,也可以提取不同于诸如一个实体的对象的具有特定意义的区域。According to this embodiment, even if one object in the sense of an object area of interest is separated from another object in time or space, they can be classified as one object. In addition, it is also possible to extract a region having a specific meaning other than an object such as an entity.

此外,结合图37至46所述的实施例和结合图49至51所述的实施例可以合并。在此情况下,在步骤S206和S207上,可以按照上述方式为连续点击的静止点击确定一个连续点击。同样,在步骤S212和S213上,可以按照上述方式为连续点击的移动点击确定一个连续点击。Furthermore, the embodiments described in connection with FIGS. 37 to 46 and the embodiments described in connection with FIGS. 49 to 51 may be combined. In this case, in steps S206 and S207, a continuous click may be determined for the static click of the continuous click in the above-mentioned manner. Likewise, in steps S212 and S213, a continuous click may be determined for a continuous click of a moving click in the manner described above.

图52示出了图1所示的图像发送设备的第三结构实例。在图52中,与图28相同的部分用相似的标号表示,并省略其说明。换句话说,除交换部分3-3具有收费服务器4外,图52所示的图像发送系统的结构与图28所示的图像发送系统的结构基本相同。Fig. 52 shows a third configuration example of the image transmission device shown in Fig. 1 . In FIG. 52, the same parts as those in FIG. 28 are denoted by like reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In other words, the structure of the image distribution system shown in FIG. 52 is basically the same as that of the image distribution system shown in FIG. 28, except that the exchange section 3-3 has the charging server 4.

尽管从接收设备2向发送设备1发送点击数据(或控制信息)和从发送设备1向接收设备2提供相应于一个点击数据具有改善了空间分辨率的图像的这样一种服务(在下文中,这种服务被称之为点击服务)可以是免费服务,但该服务可以是收费服务。当点击服务是收费服务时,收费服务器4执行一种收费处理,从用户收取该点击服务的服务费。Although such a service of transmitting click data (or control information) from the receiving device 2 to the transmitting device 1 and providing an image having an improved spatial resolution corresponding to one click data from the transmitting device 1 to the receiving device 2 (hereinafter, this Such a service is called a click service) may be a free service, but the service may be a paid service. When the click service is a charging service, the charging server 4 executes a charging process of collecting the service fee of the click service from the user.

换言之,图53示出了图52所示的收费服务器4的结构实例。In other words, FIG. 53 shows an example of the configuration of the charging server 4 shown in FIG. 52 .

预定信息从交换站3-3供应给通信链路建立检测部分301。通信链路建立检测部分301核对从交换站3-3供应的信息。结果,通信链路建立检测部分301检测在作为发送设备的终端单元1与作为接收设备的终端单元2之间是否已经建立的通信链路,并把合成数据供应给终端单元认同部分302。The predetermined information is supplied to the communication link establishment detecting section 301 from the switching station 3-3. The communication link establishment detection section 301 checks the information supplied from the switching station 3-3. As a result, the communication link establishment detecting section 301 detects whether a communication link has been established between the terminal unit 1 as the transmitting device and the terminal unit 2 as the receiving device, and supplies the synthesized data to the terminal unit approving section 302 .

当终端单元认同部分302接收到代表已经在诸如发送设备1和接收设备2的终端单元之间建立通信链路的信息(在下文中,该信息被称之为通信链路建立信息)时,终端单元认同部分302核对从交换站3-3供应的信息。结果,终端单元认同部分302认同已经通信链接的终端单元。此外,终端单元认同部分302认同分配给终端单元的ID(在下文中,ID被称之为终端单元ID)并把认同的终端单元ID供应给点击检测部分303。When the terminal unit approval section 302 receives information representing that a communication link has been established between terminal units such as the transmitting device 1 and the receiving device 2 (hereinafter, this information is referred to as communication link establishment information), the terminal unit The approval section 302 checks the information supplied from the switching station 3-3. As a result, the terminal unit approval section 302 authorizes the terminal unit that has been communicatively linked. Further, the terminal unit approval section 302 approves an ID assigned to a terminal unit (hereinafter, the ID is referred to as a terminal unit ID) and supplies the approved terminal unit ID to the click detection section 303 .

点击检测部分303监视经交换站3-3接收的数据,采用从终端单元认同部分302接收的终端单元ID检测从终端单元发送的点击数据,并把检测结果和终端单元ID供应给收费处理部分304。The click detection section 303 monitors the data received via the exchange station 3-3, detects the click data transmitted from the terminal unit using the terminal unit ID received from the terminal unit approval section 302, and supplies the detection result and the terminal unit ID to the charge processing section 304 .

在此情况下,例如,接收设备2将发送点击数据和本地终端单元ID一起发送。点击检测部分303将附加到经交换站3-3接收的点击数据上的终端单元ID与终端单元认同部分302供应的终端单元ID相比较,认同从已经通信链接的终端单元发送的点击数据,并检测该点击数据。In this case, for example, the reception device 2 transmits the transmission click data together with the local terminal unit ID. The click detection section 303 compares the terminal unit ID attached to the click data received via the switching station 3-3 with the terminal unit ID supplied from the terminal unit approval section 302, approves the click data sent from the terminal unit which has been communicated linked, and Detect this click data.

在下文中,点击检测部分303的一组点击数据检测结果和一个终端单元ID被称作点击检测信息。Hereinafter, a set of click data detection results and a terminal unit ID by the click detection section 303 is referred to as click detection information.

当收费处理部分304接收到来自点击检测部分303的点击检测信息时,收费处理部分304更新收费数据库305的存储内容。此外,收费处理部分304相应于收费数据库305的存储内容,(例如)周期性地(例如,每月一次)执行收费处理。When the charging processing section 304 receives the click detection information from the click detecting section 303 , the charging processing section 304 updates the storage content of the charging database 305 . Furthermore, the billing processing section 304 performs billing processing, for example, periodically (for example, once a month) corresponding to the storage contents of the billing database 305 .

收费数据库305存储收费处理所需的信息。The billing database 305 stores information necessary for billing processing.

下面,结合图54所示的流程图说明图53所示的收费服务器4的处理。Next, the processing of the billing server 4 shown in FIG. 53 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 54 .

通信链路建立检测部分301监视终端单元之间的通信链路是否已经相应于交换站3-3供给的信息而建立。当通信链路建立检测部分301检测到发送设备1与接收设备2之间的通信链路已经建立时,通信链路建立检测部分301把通信链路建立信息供应给终端单元认同部分302。The communication link establishment detecting section 301 monitors whether or not the communication link between the terminal units has been established corresponding to the information supplied from the switching station 3-3. When communication link establishment detection section 301 detects that the communication link between transmission device 1 and reception device 2 has been established, communication link establishment detection section 301 supplies communication link establishment information to terminal unit approval section 302 .

当终端单元认同部分302收到通信链路建立检测部分301发送的通信链路建立信息时,在步骤S301,终端单元认同部分302核对交换站3-3供应的信息。结果,终端单元认同部分302认同已经通信链接的终端单元(例如,发送设备1和接收设备2)的终端单元ID,并把终端单元ID供应给点击检测部分303。When the terminal unit approval section 302 receives the communication link establishment information transmitted from the communication link establishment detection section 301, in step S301, the terminal unit approval section 302 checks the information supplied from the switching station 3-3. As a result, the terminal unit identification section 302 identifies the terminal unit IDs of the terminal units (for example, the transmitting device 1 and the receiving device 2 ) that have been communicatively linked, and supplies the terminal unit IDs to the click detecting section 303 .

当点击检测部分303收到来自终端单元认同部分302的终端单元ID时,点击检测部分303开始检测包含终端单元ID的点击数据。When the click detection section 303 receives the terminal unit ID from the terminal unit approval section 302, the click detection section 303 starts to detect click data including the terminal unit ID.

此后,流程前进到步骤S302。在步骤S302,收费处理部分304确定是否已经从已经通信链接的终端单元检测到点击数据。当步骤S302上的确定结果表明还未从已经通信链接的终端单元检测到点击数据时(即,当点击检测部分303未向收费处理部分304供应点击检测信息时),流程前进到步骤S304,跳过步骤S303。Thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S302. In step S302, the charging processing section 304 determines whether click data has been detected from a terminal unit that has been communicatively linked. When the determined result on the step S302 shows that the click data has not been detected from the terminal unit of the communication link (that is, when the click detection section 303 does not supply the click detection information to the charge processing section 304), the flow proceeds to step S304, and jumps to Go through step S303.

相反,当步骤S302上的确定结果表明已经从已经通信链接的终端单元检测到点击数据时(即,当点击检测部分303向收费处理部分304供应点击检测信息时),流程前进到步骤S303。在步骤S303,收费处理部分304更新收费数据库305的存储内容。In contrast, when the determined result at step S302 indicates that click data has been detected from the terminal unit that has been communicatively linked (ie, when the click detection section 303 supplies the click detection information to the charging processing section 304), the flow advances to step S303. In step S303, the charging processing section 304 updates the storage content of the charging database 305.

换句话说,收费数据库305存储诸如点击数目和点间时间的点击信息(在下文中,该信息可以被称作点击信息)以及存储终端单元发出一个呼叫和开始一个通信的通信时间。收费数据库305相关地存储该点击信息和终端单元的终端单元ID。在步骤S303,收费处理部分304相应于点击检测信息更新与点击检测信息中含有的终端单元ID相对应的点击信息。In other words, the charge database 305 stores click information such as the number of clicks and time between points (hereinafter, this information may be referred to as click information) and stores the communication time for a terminal unit to place a call and start a communication. The charging database 305 stores the click information and the terminal unit ID of the terminal unit in relation to each other. In step S303, the charging processing section 304 updates the click information corresponding to the terminal unit ID contained in the click detection information corresponding to the click detection information.

在步骤S303之后,流程前进到步骤S304。在步骤S304上,终端单元认同部分302确定与通信链路建立检测部分301供给的通信链路建立信息相对应的通信链路是否已经中断。After step S303, the process proceeds to step S304. At step S304, the terminal unit approval section 302 determines whether or not the communication link corresponding to the communication link establishment information supplied from the communication link establishment detection section 301 has been interrupted.

换句话说,通信链路建立检测部分301不仅监视终端单元间的通信链路的建立,而且还监视该链路的中端。当通信链路已经中断时,通信链路建立检测部分301把作为通信链路中断信息的结果信息供应给终端单元认同部分302。在步骤S304,终端单元认同部分302相应于通信链路中断信息确定通信链路是否已经中断。In other words, the communication link establishment detecting section 301 monitors not only the establishment of the communication link between the terminal units but also the intermediate end of the link. When the communication link has been interrupted, the communication link establishment detection section 301 supplies result information as communication link interruption information to the terminal unit approval section 302 . In step S304, the terminal unit approval section 302 determines whether or not the communication link has been interrupted corresponding to the communication link interruption information.

当步骤S304上的确定结果表明通信链路未中断时,流程前进到步骤S302。在步骤S302,收费服务器4重复相似的处理。When the determined result at step S304 indicates that the communication link is not interrupted, the flow proceeds to step S302. In step S302, the charging server 4 repeats similar processing.

相反,当步骤S304上的确定结果表明通信链路已经中断时,终端单元认同部分302控制点击检测部分303完成对已经通信链接的终端单元的点击数据的监视。此后,收费处理服务器4完成该处理。In contrast, when the determined result at step S304 indicates that the communication link has been interrupted, the terminal unit approval section 302 controls the click detection section 303 to complete monitoring of the click data of the terminal unit that has been communication linked. Thereafter, the charging processing server 4 completes the processing.

此后,收费处理部分304周期性地核对收费数据库305,执行收费处理,计算通信费和点击服务费,并从用户的银行帐户或类似物中转帐(转费)。Thereafter, the charge processing section 304 periodically checks the charge database 305, performs charge processing, calculates communication charges and click service charges, and transfers (transfers) from the user's bank account or the like.

作为点击服务费,可以指定每次点击的计费单位。相应于点击的次数,可以计算点击服务费。另一方面,作为点击服务费,可以指定每小时的计费单位。相应于点击时间,可以计算点击服务费。另一方面,相应于点击次数和点击时间,可以计算点击服务费。As the click service fee, a charging unit for each click can be specified. Corresponding to the number of clicks, a click service fee may be calculated. On the other hand, as the click service fee, a charging unit per hour may be specified. Corresponding to the click time, a click service fee may be calculated. On the other hand, corresponding to the number of clicks and the click time, a click service fee may be calculated.

上述处理可以由硬件或软件执行。当这些处理由软件执行时,对作为专用硬件设备的设置在发送设备1、接收设备2中的计算机、通用计算机或类似物等安装组成该软件的程序。The above-described processing can be executed by hardware or software. When these processes are executed by software, a program constituting the software is installed to a computer provided in the transmitting device 1, the receiving device 2, a general-purpose computer, or the like, which are dedicated hardware devices.

图55示出了已经安装了执行上述处理的程序的一个计算机的结构实例。Fig. 55 shows an example of the structure of a computer in which a program for executing the above-mentioned processing has been installed.

该程序可以被预先录制到作为内置在计算机内的一个记录介质的硬盘405或ROM403上。The program can be recorded in advance on the hard disk 405 or ROM 403 which is one recording medium built in the computer.

另一方面,该程序可以暂时或永久地存储(记录)到可移动记录介质诸如软盘、CD-ROM(光盘只读存储器)、MO(磁光)盘、DVD(数字通用盘)、磁盘或半导体存储器上。可移动记录介质411可以被设置为所谓的软件包。On the other hand, the program may be temporarily or permanently stored (recorded) on a removable recording medium such as a floppy disk, CD-ROM (Compact Disk Read Only Memory), MO (Magneto Optical) disk, DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), magnetic disk or semiconductor on memory. The removable recording medium 411 can be set as a so-called software package.

该程序可以从上述的可移动记录介质411安装到计算机上。另一方面,该程序可以从下载点经数字卫星广播卫星无线传送给该计算机。再一方面,该程序可以经过诸如LAN(局域网)的网络或因特网传送给该计算机。在该计算机中,该程序由通信部分408接收并安装到硬盘405上。This program can be installed on a computer from the above-mentioned removable recording medium 411 . Alternatively, the program can be wirelessly transmitted to the computer from a download point via a digital satellite broadcasting satellite. On the other hand, the program can be transmitted to the computer via a network such as LAN (Local Area Network) or the Internet. In this computer, the program is received by the communication section 408 and installed on the hard disk 405 .

该计算机含有CPU(中央处理单元)402。输入/输出接口410经总线401连接CPU402。当用户使用诸如键盘、鼠标、麦克风等的输入部分407经输入/输出接口410向CPU402输入一个命令时,ROM(只读存储器)403中存储的程序开始执行。另一方面,CPU402把硬盘405中存储的程序加载到RAM(随机存取存储器)404上,并利用RAM404执行该程序。再一方面,CPU402把从卫星或网络传送、由通信部分408接收并安装到硬盘405上的程序,或者从连接到驱动器409的可移动记录介质411中读出并安装到硬盘405上的程序,加载到RAM404上,利用ARM404执行该程序。因而,CPU402执行相应于图4、6、10、14、21至24、27、30、32、34、36、38、39、41、43至45、50、51和54所示的流程图的处理。而且CPU402执行相应于图3、5、7、8、11至13、17、25、29、31、33、35、37、47至49和53的框图所示的处理。必要时,CPU402经输入/输出接口410从包括LCD(液晶显示器)、扬声器等的输出部分406输出已处理的结果。另一方面,CPU402发送来自通信部分408或者记录到硬盘405上的已处理的结果。This computer contains a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 402 . The input/output interface 410 is connected to the CPU 402 via the bus 401 . When a user inputs a command to CPU 402 via input/output interface 410 using input section 407 such as a keyboard, mouse, microphone, etc., programs stored in ROM (Read Only Memory) 403 start executing. On the other hand, CPU 402 loads a program stored in hard disk 405 onto RAM (Random Access Memory) 404 and executes the program using RAM 404 . On the other hand, the CPU 402 transmits from a satellite or network, receives and installs a program on the hard disk 405 by the communication section 408, or reads a program from a removable recording medium 411 connected to the drive 409 and installs it on the hard disk 405, Load it on RAM404, and use ARM404 to execute the program. Thus, the CPU 402 executes processes corresponding to the flow charts shown in FIGS. deal with. And the CPU 402 executes the processing shown in the block diagrams corresponding to FIGS. The CPU 402 outputs the processed result from an output section 406 including an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), a speaker, etc. via an input/output interface 410 as necessary. On the other hand, the CPU 402 transmits the processed result from the communication section 408 or recorded to the hard disk 405 .

具体地说,使计算机执行各种处理的程序的处理步骤不一定总是按照流程图的顺序执行。另一方面,处理步骤可以并行或分离地执行(例如,可以执行并行处理或对象处理)。Specifically, the processing steps of the programs that cause the computer to execute various processing are not always executed in the order of the flowcharts. On the other hand, processing steps may be performed in parallel or separately (eg, parallel processing or object processing may be performed).

该程序可以由一个计算机处理。另一方面,该程序可以由多个计算机分配。再一方面。该程序可以传送到一个远端计算机上,由该计算机执行处理。The program can be processed by a computer. On the other hand, the program can be distributed by multiple computers. On the other hand. The program can be transmitted to a remote computer where processing is performed.

根据本发明的实施例,发送设备1执行分层编码。根据发送的分层数据,改变接收设备2显示的图像的时间分辨率或空间分辨率。另一方面,接收设备2显示的图像的时间分辨率和空间分辨率可以根据发送的图像的离散余旋变换系数或量化级(quantizing step)来改变。According to an embodiment of the present invention, the transmitting device 1 performs layered coding. According to the transmitted hierarchical data, the temporal resolution or spatial resolution of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 is changed. On the other hand, the temporal resolution and spatial resolution of the image displayed by the receiving device 2 can be changed according to the discrete cosine transform coefficient or quantizing step of the transmitted image.

另一方面,时间分辨率和空间分辨率可以根据发送设备1的编码方法来改变。换句话说,当用一个常规时间分辨率显示一个图像时,发送设备1的编码部分31对其对象的轮廓连续编码,并获得组成一个对象的像素值(颜色)的平均值,作为典型值。接收设备2按照该典型值显示彩色对象的区域。当以时间分辨率为代价显示具有改善的空间分辨率的图像时,可以按上所述的那样使用分层编码。On the other hand, temporal resolution and spatial resolution can be changed according to the encoding method of the transmitting device 1 . In other words, when an image is displayed with a conventional time resolution, the encoding section 31 of the transmitting device 1 continuously encodes the outline of its object, and obtains the average value of pixel values (colors) constituting an object as a typical value. The receiving device 2 displays the area of the colored object according to this typical value. Hierarchical coding can be used as described above when displaying images with improved spatial resolution at the expense of temporal resolution.

根据该实施例,空间分辨率的改善是以时间分辨率为代价的。相反,时间分辨率可以以空间分辨率为代价得到改善。代表牺牲(改善)分辨率的选择的信息可以被包含在诸如点击数据的控制信息中,并从接收设备2发送给发送设备1。According to this embodiment, the improvement in spatial resolution comes at the expense of temporal resolution. Instead, temporal resolution can be improved at the expense of spatial resolution. Information representing the choice of sacrificing (improving) resolution may be included in control information such as click data, and transmitted from the receiving device 2 to the transmitting device 1 .

根据本方明的实施例,时间分辨率和空间分辨率被处理。然而,根据本发明,电平方向的分辨率(在下文中,把该分辨率称作电平分辨率)也可以被处理。换句话说,当分配给数据的比特数增加或降低时,时间分辨率和空间分辨率可以提高或恶化。在此情况下,当图像的时间分辨率和空间分辨率变化时,其明暗度也变化。该电平分辨率可以通过改变上述的量化级来改变。According to an embodiment of the invention, temporal resolution and spatial resolution are handled. However, according to the present invention, resolution in the level direction (hereinafter, the resolution is referred to as level resolution) can also be handled. In other words, when the number of bits allocated to data increases or decreases, temporal resolution and spatial resolution can improve or deteriorate. In this case, as the temporal resolution and spatial resolution of the image vary, its lightness and darkness also vary. The level resolution can be changed by changing the quantization scale described above.

此外,根据该实施例,图像的部分区域(优先权范围)的空间分辨率的改善是以时间分辨率为代价的。另一方面,整个图像的空间分辨率也可以得到改善。Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the improvement of the spatial resolution of the partial region of the image (priority range) is at the expense of the temporal resolution. On the other hand, the spatial resolution of the entire image can also be improved.

另一方面,图像的特定部分的空间分辨率的改善可以以图像的剩余部分的空间分辨率为代价,而不是以时间分辨率为代价(即,保持时间分辨率)。On the other hand, the improvement of the spatial resolution of a certain part of the image can be at the expense of the spatial resolution of the rest of the image, rather than at the expense of the temporal resolution (ie, maintaining the temporal resolution).

此外,根据本实施例,以这种方式处理图像,即将其分为背景图像和对象。而且也可以以不分离图像的方式处理图像。Also, according to the present embodiment, an image is processed in such a way that it is divided into a background image and an object. It is also possible to process images without separating them.

此外,本发明不仅适用于图像数据,而且还适用于音频数据。在音频数据的情况下,采样频率相当于时间分辨率,而分配给音频数据的比特数相当于电平分辨率。Furthermore, the present invention is applicable not only to image data but also to audio data. In the case of audio data, the sampling frequency corresponds to time resolution, and the number of bits allocated to audio data corresponds to level resolution.

此外,图49所示的变化确定和归类部分240的处理可适用于提取声音特征量(例如音调、话音或乐器的期望部分)的情况。In addition, the processing of the change determination and classification section 240 shown in FIG. 49 is applicable to the case of extracting sound feature quantities such as pitch, voice, or a desired part of a musical instrument.

此外,对象提取部分14和1014以及变化确定和归类部分240的处理可适用于所谓的对象编码。换句话说,对于对象提取部分14和1014以及变化确定和归类部分240的处理来说,由于可以提取对象,因此可以相应于获取代表对象移动的信息的对象编码处理,对被提取的对象以及代表对象轮廓或区域的信息进行编码。该编码的数据可以被发送或记录。In addition, the processes of the object extraction sections 14 and 1014 and the variation determination and classification section 240 are applicable to so-called object encoding. In other words, for the processing of the object extraction sections 14 and 1014 and the change determination and classification section 240, since an object can be extracted, it is possible to correspond to the object encoding process of acquiring information representing the movement of the object, and the extracted object and Encodes information representing object contours or regions. This encoded data can be transmitted or recorded.

接收设备2可以使用点击数据执行与对象提取部分1014的处理相似的处理,以便提取一个对象。在此情况下,当接收设备2提取的一个对象被存储时,一个数据库就被形成。The reception device 2 can perform processing similar to that of the object extraction section 1014 using the click data to extract an object. In this case, when an object extracted by the receiving device 2 is stored, a database is formed.

根据本发明的第一发送设备、第一发送方法、第一记录介质和第一信号,接收从接收设备发送的控制信息。相应于该控制信息,控制时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率。已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向分辨率的数据被发送给接收设备。因而,例如,接收设备所显示的图像的空间方向分辨率可以被进一步改善。According to the first transmitting device, the first transmitting method, the first recording medium and the first signal of the present invention, control information transmitted from the receiving device is received. Corresponding to the control information, resolutions in at least two directions of time direction, space direction and level direction are controlled. Data having controlled resolution in at least two directions corresponding to the control information is transmitted to the receiving device. Thus, for example, the spatial direction resolution of images displayed by the receiving device can be further improved.

根据本发明的接收设备、接收方法、第二记录介质和第二信号,控制信息被发送给发送设备,以便相应于该控制信息控制时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向上的分辨率。此外,已经相应于该控制信息控制至少两个方向分辨率的数据,从发送设备发送,然后接收和输出。因而,例如,输出的图像的空间分辨率可以被进一步改善。According to the receiving device, the receiving method, the second recording medium, and the second signal of the present invention, the control information is sent to the sending device so that the control information in at least two directions of the time direction, the space direction and the level direction is controlled corresponding to the control information. resolution. Furthermore, data having controlled resolution in at least two directions corresponding to the control information is transmitted from the transmitting device and then received and output. Thus, for example, the spatial resolution of the output image can be further improved.

根据本发明的发送和接收设备、发送和接收方法、第三记录介质和第三信号,发送设备接收从接收设备发送的控制信息。相应于该控制信息,控制时间方向、空间方向和电平方向的至少两个方向的分辨率。已经相应于控制信息控制至少两个方向分辨率的数据被发送给接收设备。此外,接收设备向发送设备发送控制信息。已经相应于该控制信息控制至少两个方向分辨率的数据,从发送设备发送,然后接收和输出。因而,例如,接收设备所显示的图像的空间方向分辨率可以被进一步改善。According to the transmitting and receiving device, the transmitting and receiving method, the third recording medium, and the third signal of the present invention, the transmitting device receives control information transmitted from the receiving device. Corresponding to the control information, resolutions in at least two directions of a time direction, a space direction and a level direction are controlled. Data having controlled resolution in at least two directions corresponding to the control information is transmitted to the receiving device. In addition, the receiving device sends control information to the sending device. Data having controlled resolution in at least two directions corresponding to the control information is transmitted from the transmitting device, then received and output. Thus, for example, the spatial direction resolution of images displayed by the receiving device can be further improved.

根据本发明的第二发送设备、第二发送方法、第四记录介质和第四信号,接收从接收设备发送的控制信号。相应于该控制信息,对数据归类。相应于数据的归类结果,向接收设备发送数据。因而,例如,可以向接收设备发送用户正在考虑的图像区域,而不考虑该区域是移动的还是静止的。According to the second transmitting device, the second transmitting method, the fourth recording medium, and the fourth signal of the present invention, the control signal transmitted from the receiving device is received. Corresponding to the control information, the data is categorized. Corresponding to the classification result of the data, the data is transmitted to the receiving device. Thus, for example, the region of the image that the user is considering may be sent to the receiving device, irrespective of whether the region is moving or stationary.

标号说明Label description

1      终端单元(发送设备)1 terminal unit (sending device)

2      终端单元(接收设备)2 terminal unit (receiving equipment)

31,3-2  无线基站31,3-2 Wireless base station

4      收费服务器4 Fee server

13     背景图像提取部分13 background image extraction part

14     对象提取部分14 object extraction part

22     组合处理部分22 Combined processing part

31     编码部分31 Encoding part

34     数据量计算部分34 Data amount calculation part

41B,41F  差值计算部分41B, 41F difference calculation part

42B,42F  分层编码部分42B, 42F layered coding part

44B,44F  本地解码器44B, 44F local decoder

51     接收部分51 Receive part

62B,62F  存储部分62B, 62F storage part

71     背景图像写入部分71 Background image writing part

73     背景图像存储器73 background image memory

75     对象存储器75 object storage

77     组合部分77 Composite parts

142    CPU142 CPUs

146    显示部分146 display part

201     图像存储器201 Image memory

203     静止区域和移动区域确定部分203 Stationary area and moving area determination part

210     移动对象连接处理部分210 Mobile object connection processing part

211     静止对象连接处理部分211 static object connection processing part

214     对象提取结果存储器214 object extraction result storage

231     输入图像存储部分231 input image storage part

234     静止区域和移动区域确定部分234 Stationary area and moving area determination part

236     兴趣目标区域归类部分236 Classification of target area of interest

237     输入时间间隔计算部分237 Enter the time interval calculation part

238     输入位置距离计算部分238 Input position distance calculation part

239     兴趣改变确定部分239 Change of Interest Determination Section

301     通信链路建立检测部分301 Communication link establishment detection part

303     点击检测部分303 click detection part

304     收费处理部分304 Charge processing part

402     CPU402 CPU

408     通信部分408 Communication part

411     可移动记录介质411 Removable recording media

1013    背景图像提取部分1013 background image extraction part

1014    对象提取部分1014 object extraction part

1022    组合处理部分1022 combined processing part

1024    点击数据输入部分1024 Click on the data entry section

1025    点击数据发送部分1025 Click on the data sending part

Claims (20)

1、一种向一个接收设备发送数据的发送设备,包括:1. A sending device for sending data to a receiving device, comprising: 接收装置,用于接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;a receiving device, configured to receive control information sent from the receiving device; 归类装置,相应于控制信息对数据归类;和classification means for classifying the data corresponding to the control information; and 发送装置,相应于数据的归类结果向接收设备发送数据。The sending means sends the data to the receiving device corresponding to the classification result of the data. 2、根据权利要求1所述的发送设备,2. The sending device according to claim 1, 其中所述的数据是图像数据,wherein said data is image data, 其中接收设备显示从所述的发送设备发送的图像数据,wherein the receiving device displays the image data sent from the sending device, 其中控制信息包含由接收设备所显示的图像数据的考虑点,和wherein the control information contains considerations of the image data displayed by the receiving device, and 其中所述的归类装置相应于包含图像数据的考虑点的考虑区域归类图像数据。The classifying means described therein classifies the image data corresponding to the considered area including the considered point of the image data. 3、根据权利要求2所述的发送设备,还包括:3. The sending device according to claim 2, further comprising: 静止区域和移动区域确定装置,用于确定图像数据的考虑点是静止的还是移动的,和stationary area and moving area determining means for determining whether the image data considered point is stationary or moving, and 连续确定装置,用于确定考虑点是否在时间方向和空间方向上连续,continuity determining means for determining whether the considered point is continuous in the time direction and in the space direction, 其中所述的归类装置相应于所述的静止区域和移动区域确定装置和连续确定装置的确定结果归类图像数据。Wherein said classifying means classifies the image data corresponding to the determination results of said still area and moving area determining means and continuous determining means. 4、根据权利要求3所述的发送设备,还包括:4. The sending device according to claim 3, further comprising: 考虑点存储装置,用于存储在静止的并且在时间和空间方向上连续的考虑区域中所含有的考虑点,和存储在移动的并且在时间和空间方向上连续的考虑区域中所含有的考虑点;和Consideration point storage means for storing the consideration points contained in the stationary and continuous consideration area in the time and space direction, and storing the consideration contained in the moving and continuous consideration area in the time and space direction points; and 类别标识符加法装置,用于获取加入到被存储在考虑点存储装置中的一个考虑点上的类别标识符,并且把该标识符加到该考虑点上。category identifier adding means for acquiring a category identifier added to a consideration point stored in the consideration point storage means, and adding the identifier to the consideration point. 5、根据权利要求4所述的发送设备,5. The sending device according to claim 4, 其中在当前考虑点处于静止的并在时间和空间方向上连续的考虑区域内的情况下,当存储在所述考虑点存储装置中的前一考虑点被包含在静止的并在时间和空间方向上连续的考虑区域内时,相应于当前考虑点与含有前一考虑点的区域之间空间位置的关系,所述的类别标识符加法装置获得被加入到当前考虑点上的类别标识符。Wherein in the case where the current consideration point is in a stationary and continuous consideration area in the time and space direction, when the previous consideration point stored in the consideration point storage means is included in the stationary and in the time and space direction When within the continuous consideration area, corresponding to the spatial position relationship between the current consideration point and the area containing the previous consideration point, the category identifier addition means obtains the category identifier added to the current consideration point. 6、根据权利要求4所述的发送设备,6. The sending device according to claim 4, 其中在当前考虑点处于移动的并在时间和空间方向上连续的考虑区域内的情况下,当存储在所述考虑点存储装置中的前一考虑点被包含在移动的并在时间和空间方向上连续的考虑区域内时,相应于含有当前考虑点的考虑区域的预定特征量和含有前一考虑点的考虑区域的预定特征量的相似性,所述的类别标识符加法装置获得被加入到当前考虑点的类别标识符。Wherein in the case that the current consideration point is in the moving and continuous consideration area in the time and space direction, when the previous consideration point stored in the consideration point storage device is included in the moving and in the time and space direction When within the continuous consideration area, corresponding to the similarity between the predetermined feature quantity of the consideration area containing the current consideration point and the predetermined feature quantity of the consideration area containing the previous consideration point, the category identifier adding means is added to The class identifier for the current consideration point. 7、根据权利要求4所述的发送设备,7. The sending device according to claim 4, 其中所述的归类装置相应于所述考虑点存储装置中存储的考虑点的密度对作为一个对象的图像数据的预定区域进行归类。Wherein said classifying means classifies a predetermined area of the image data as an object corresponding to the density of the considered points stored in said considered point storage means. 8、根据权利要求7所述的发送设备,8. The sending device according to claim 7, 其中所述的归类装置相应于所述考虑点存储装置中存储的并包含在静止的考虑区域中的分配了相同类别标识符的考虑点的密度,对作为一个对象的图像数据的预定区域进行归类。Wherein said categorization means is corresponding to the density of the consideration points assigned with the same category identifier stored in the consideration point storage means and included in the static consideration area, and performs a predetermined region of the image data as an object. categorized. 9、根据权利要求7所述的发送设备,9. The sending device according to claim 7, 其中所述的归类装置相应于所述考虑点存储装置中存储的包含在移动的考虑区域中的,分配了相同类别标识符和进行了移动补偿的考虑点的密度,对作为一个对象的图像数据的预定区域进行归类。Wherein said categorization means is corresponding to the density of the consideration points that are included in the moving consideration area stored in the consideration point storage means, assigned the same category identifier and performed motion compensation, for an image as an object A predetermined area of data is categorized. 10、根据权利要求3所述的发送设备,10. The sending device according to claim 3, 其中所述的静止区域和移动区域确定装置相应于包含当前帧的考虑点的考虑区域与包含过去帧的考虑点的考虑区域之间的差值,确定包含当前考虑点的考虑区域是静止的还是移动的。Wherein said static area and moving area determination means are corresponding to the difference between the considered area containing the considered point of the current frame and the considered area containing the considered point of the past frame, determine whether the considered area containing the current considered point is stationary or mobile. 11、根据权利要求3所述的发送设备,11. The sending device according to claim 3, 其中所述的连续确定装置相应于当前考虑点与过去考虑点的时间差值,确定当前考虑点是否在时间和空间方向上连续。Wherein said continuity determining means determines whether the current consideration point is continuous in time and space direction corresponding to the time difference between the current consideration point and the past consideration point. 12、根据权利要求7所述的发送设备,12. The sending device according to claim 7, 其中所述的归类装置改善按对象归类的区域的分辨率。The classification device described therein improves the resolution of the object-classified regions. 13、根据权利要求3所述的发送设备,13. The sending device according to claim 3, 其中所述的连续确定装置相应于当前考虑点与过去考虑点之间的时间和空间方向上的距离确定当前考虑点是否连续,获得与包含当前考虑点的考虑区域相同的静止区域和移动区域确定结果。Wherein said continuity determination means determines whether the current consideration point is continuous corresponding to the distance between the current consideration point and the past consideration point in the time and space direction, and obtains the same static area and moving area determination as the consideration area containing the current consideration point result. 14、根据权利要求13所述的发送设备,14. Sending device according to claim 13, 其中所述的归类装置相应于用于时间方向和空间方向距离的加权值对图像数据进行归类。The sorting device described therein sorts the image data according to the weighting values for the distances in the time direction and in the space direction. 15、根据权利要求13所述的发送设备,还包括:15. The sending device according to claim 13, further comprising: 图像数据存储装置,用于存储包含在时间方向和空间方向连续的考虑点的考虑区域中的图像数据。Image data storage means for storing image data contained in the consideration area of the consideration points continuous in the time direction and the space direction. 16、根据权利要求15所述的发送设备,16. The sending device according to claim 15, 其中当当前考虑点在时间方向和空间方向上不连续时,在所述的图像数据存储装置的内容被读出后,擦除其内容,并把包含当前考虑点的考虑区域中的图像数据存储到所述的图像数据存储装置上。Wherein when the current consideration point is discontinuous in the time direction and the space direction, after the content of the image data storage device is read out, its content is erased, and the image data in the consideration area containing the current consideration point is stored to the image data storage device. 17、根据权利要求16所述的发送设备,17. The sending device according to claim 16, 其中所述的归类装置改善从所述的图像数据存储装置中读出的图像数据的分辨率。Wherein said sorting device improves the resolution of the image data read out from said image data storage device. 18、根据权利要求1所述的发送设备,18. The sending device according to claim 1, 其中控制信息被用于一个收费处理。Wherein the control information is used for a charging process. 19、根据权利要求2所述的发送设备,19. The sending device according to claim 2, 其中图像数据是编码的对象。The image data is the object of encoding. 20、一种向一个接收设备发送数据的发送方法,包括以下步骤:20. A sending method for sending data to a receiving device, comprising the following steps: 接收从接收设备发送的控制信息;receiving control information sent from the receiving device; 相应于控制信息对数据归类;和classify the data corresponding to the control information; and 相应于数据的归类结果向接收设备发送数据。The data is transmitted to the receiving device corresponding to the classification result of the data.
CN 200510084849 1999-08-09 2000-08-09 Transmitting apparatus and method Expired - Fee Related CN100584003C (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP22502099 1999-08-09
JP225020/99 1999-08-09
JP127657/00 2000-04-24
JP214237/00 2000-07-14

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CNB008020485A Division CN100366090C (en) 1999-08-09 2000-08-09 Transmitting device and transmitting method, receiving device and receiving method, transmitting/receiving device and transmitting/receiving method, recorded medium and signal

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN1842158A CN1842158A (en) 2006-10-04
CN100584003C true CN100584003C (en) 2010-01-20

Family

ID=37030980

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN 200710142654 Expired - Fee Related CN101106707B (en) 1999-08-09 2000-08-09 Transmitting apparatus and method
CN 200710142655 Expired - Fee Related CN101106708B (en) 1999-08-09 2000-08-09 Transmitting apparatus and method
CN 200510084849 Expired - Fee Related CN100584003C (en) 1999-08-09 2000-08-09 Transmitting apparatus and method

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN 200710142654 Expired - Fee Related CN101106707B (en) 1999-08-09 2000-08-09 Transmitting apparatus and method
CN 200710142655 Expired - Fee Related CN101106708B (en) 1999-08-09 2000-08-09 Transmitting apparatus and method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
CN (3) CN101106707B (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103096086A (en) * 2013-02-06 2013-05-08 上海风格信息技术股份有限公司 Method of sampling forward in multi-picture display to achieve system optimization
CN113660495A (en) * 2021-08-11 2021-11-16 易谷网络科技股份有限公司 Real-time video stream compression method, device, electronic device and storage medium

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5475421A (en) * 1992-06-03 1995-12-12 Digital Equipment Corporation Video data scaling for video teleconferencing workstations communicating by digital data network
TW358296B (en) * 1996-11-12 1999-05-11 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Digital picture encoding method and digital picture encoding apparatus, digital picture decoding method and digital picture decoding apparatus, and data storage medium
US6002803A (en) * 1997-03-11 1999-12-14 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Methods of coding the order information for multiple-layer vertices

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101106708B (en) 2010-11-03
CN101106708A (en) 2008-01-16
CN101106707A (en) 2008-01-16
CN1842158A (en) 2006-10-04
CN101106707B (en) 2010-11-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4697500B2 (en) TRANSMISSION DEVICE, TRANSMISSION METHOD, RECEPTION DEVICE, RECEPTION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM
US8798168B2 (en) Video telecommunication system for synthesizing a separated object with a new background picture
KR100846252B1 (en) Information processing apparatus, system and method, and recording medium
US9456208B2 (en) Method of content adaptive video encoding
US6766059B1 (en) Image processing apparatus
US7966005B2 (en) Data processing system and method, communication system and method, and charging apparatus and method
US10341654B1 (en) Computing device for content adaptive video decoding
JP2009501476A (en) Processing method and apparatus using video time up-conversion
US6970513B1 (en) System for content adaptive video decoding
EP1006482A2 (en) Encoding separately image object and its boundary
CN100584003C (en) Transmitting apparatus and method
CN113452996A (en) Video coding and decoding method and device
JPH10155139A (en) Image processor and image processing method
JP4321468B2 (en) Moving picture coding apparatus and moving picture decoding apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
PB01 Publication
C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
C14 Grant of patent or utility model
GR01 Patent grant
C17 Cessation of patent right
CF01 Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee

Granted publication date: 20100120

Termination date: 20130809